Home
        Rev AB - AMETEK Programmable Power
         Contents
1.      Command Syntax DO160 ABNormal F REQuency TRANsient  Parameters none   Examples DO160 ABN FREQ TRAN   Query Syntax none   Returned Parameters none       DO160 CATegory    This command will select the proper equipment category in DC mode only  It has no effect  in AC mode     Command Syntax DO160 CATegory  Parameters  lt A  B Z gt   Examples DO160 CAT B  Query Syntax DO160 CAT        DO160 STANdard    This command will select the proper standard  The standard selection must be verified prior  to any test selection  Airbus standard is the same as the Eurocae standard with the  exception of nominal voltage modulation     Command Syntax DO160 STANdard  Parameters  lt RTCA EURocae AIRBus gt   Examples DO160 STAN RTCA  Query Syntax DO160 STAN        DO160 GROup    This command is used to select equipment Group 1  2 or 3  It is only valid with the  EUROCAE standard     Command Syntax DO160 GROup  lt NR1 gt   Parameters 1 through 3    Examples DO160 GROup 2  Query Syntax DO160 GRO        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 189    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    9 5 MIL STD 704E   704 Option     MIL STD 704 tests for revisions D and E only can be executed remotely from the GPIB or    RS232 using the following command tree  See the iX Series   User Manual  P N 7000 970     or iX Series Il User Manual  P N 4994 970  for more details about each 704 test step     MIL STD 704 tests for revisions A  B  C and F are implemented only through the CIGui32  Windows so
2.      Parameters Optional block and offset parameters  lt n gt   lt n gt   Where the first value   lt n gt  is the number of 256 sample blocks to transfer and the second    value  lt n gt  is the first block  offset  to start with  Number of blocks is  from 1 to 16  offset is from 0 to 15    Examples MEAS ARR CURR  FETC ARR CURR  4 0   Returned Parameters 4096 data points in arbitrary block data format   Related Commands INST NSEL SENS SWE       MEASure ARRay CURRent HARMonic    lt nrf gt    FETCh ARRay CURRent HARMonic    lt nrf gt      Phase Selectable    These queries return an array of harmonic amplitudes of output current in rms amperes  The  first value returned is the dc component  the second value is the fundamental frequency  and  so on up to the 50th harmonic  Harmonic orders can be measured up to the fundamental  measurement bandwidth of the measurement system    UX Series    19 531 kHz in single phase mode and 6 510 kHz in three phase mode   i iX Series Il  48 kHz in single phase mode and 16 kHz in three phase mode     Thus  the maximum harmonic that can be measured is dependent on the output frequency   Any harmonics that represent frequencies greater than the above frequencies are returned  as 0     The total number of harmonic values returned may be specified as a parameter to the query  command  Only harmonic data values from 0  dc  to the number specified will be returned   This capability may be used to reduce the transfer time by avoiding the transfer of unw
3.      X Series 199    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    Appendix B  SCPI Conformance Information  SCPI Version  The i series and ix series AC DC power sources conform to SCPI version 1995 0     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 200    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    Appendix C  Error Messages    Any errors that occur during operation from either the front panel or the remote control  interface will result in error messages  Error messages are displayed in the upper left hand  corner of the LCD display  They are also stored in the error message queue from which they  can be queried using the SYST ERR  Query  The error queue has a finite depth  If more  error messages are generated than can be held in the queue  a queue overflow message  will be put in the last queue location  To empty the queue  use the error query until the No  Error result is received     Errors appearing on the LCD will generally remain visible until the user moves to another  screen  If multiple error messages are generated in succession  only the last message will  be visible as there is only space for one error message on the LCD display     The same area of the display is also used to display status messages  While error messages  always have a negative error number  status messages have a positive number     The table below displays a list of possible error and status messages along with their  possible cause and remedy     Noro   noes   y Y     100  
4.     AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    SYSTem COMMunicate LAN PASSword    This command will set the user password  The password is used to access to LAN  configuration screen from the Web page  The default password is    admin     The description is  limited to 8 characters     Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN PASSword  lt SRD gt   Parameters  lt SRD gt   Example SYST COMM LAN PASS    admin       Query Syntax SYST COMM LAN PASS   Returned Parameters  lt SRD gt        SYSTem COMMunicate LAN PORT    This command will set the socket port number  The query format returns the port number  set  The default value is 5025     Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN PORT lt NRF gt   Parameters 0  65535  Example SYST COMM LAN PORT 5025    Query Syntax SYST COMM LAN  PORT   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 115    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BAUD    This command will set the SERial communication baud rate     Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BAUD  lt NRF gt   Parameters 1200   2400   4800   9600   38400   57600    115200          available on i iX Series II only    Example SYST COMM SER BAUD 9600  Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt        SYSTem COMMunicate SERial PARity    This command will set the SERial communication parity     Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERial PARity  lt parity gt   Parameters NONE EVEN ODD   Example SYST COMM SER PAR NONE   Returned 
5.     Related Commands ABOR TRIG SOUR  TRIG PHAS INIT   INIT CONT  TRG       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 123    5  Common Commands    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments       Common commands begin with an   and consist of three letters  commana  or three letters    and a    query   Common commands are defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard to perform  some common interface functions  The AC DC power source responds to the required    common commands that control status reporting  synchronization  and internal operations  It    also responds to optional common commands that control triggers  and stored operating    parameters     Common commands and queries are listed alphabetically lf a command has a    corresponding query that simply returns the data or status specified by the command  then  both command and query are included under the explanation for the command  If a query  does not have a corresponding command or is functionally different from the command  then    the query is listed separately  The description for each common command or query    specifies any status registers affected  Refer to chapter 7 for details on how to read specific  register bits and use the information that they return     Common Commands Syntax     CLS   ESE  lt n gt    ESE    ESR    IDN    OPC   OPC    OPT    PSC  lt bool gt    PSC    RCL  lt n gt    RST   SAV  lt n gt    SRE  lt n gt    SRE    STB    TRG   WAI    iM Series   i Series     X Series    Clear status   Standa
6.     This command will set the voltage and frequency to the maximum level for the normal  operation     Command Syntax DO160 NORMal VOLT_FREQ  MAXimum  Parameters none    Examples DO160 NORM VOLT_FREQ MAX  Query Syntax none       DO160 NORMal VOLTage UNBalance    This command will unbalance the voltage level for each phase to the normal high and low  operating voltage of each phase  This test is valid only for three phase AC source     Command Syntax DO160 NORMal VOLTage UNBalance  Parameters none   Examples DO160 NORM VOLT UNB   Query Syntax none       DO160 NORMal WAVeform DISTortion    This command will set the voltage distortion to 5  for the duration of the test     Command Syntax DO160 NORMal WAVeform DISTortion  Parameters none   Examples DO160 NORM WAV DIST   Query Syntax none       DO160 NORMal VOLTage MODulation    This command will cause output voltage modulation  The level of modulation is the function  of the rate of modulation  Refer to Figure 9 4 in the User Manual  The command parameter  is the rate of modulation in Hz     Command Syntax DO160 NORMal VOLTage MODulation  lt NRf gt   Parameters  lt frequency gt   Examples DO160 NORM VOLT MOD 20    Query Syntax DO160 NORM VOLT MOD   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 185    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    DO160 NORMal VOLTage INTerrupt    This command will cause output voltage interruption  There are 15 different levels of  interruption  Refer to Figu
7.     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 71    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 10 4 External Trigger Output    OUTPut TTLTrg MODE    This command sets the operation of the Trigger Out signal to either Function Strobe or  Trigger mode  Note that on Series Il systems having firmware revision 4 00 or higher  factory  default is Trigger state which means the OUTP TTLT STAT command is required to  generate outputs  On Series   iX units having firmware 2 XX or 3 XX  default mode is FSTR   This command does not apply to Series   units  On Series   units  the OUTPUT TTLT 1  command will force the mode to trigger output mode  In Function Strobe mode  an output  pulse is generated automatically any time an output parameter such as voltage  frequency or  phase is programmed  The AC source Trigger Out signal is available at the BNC connector  on the rear of the power source    Note that the desired mode must be set after turning on the power source as it is not  retained as part of the INIT subsystem     Command Syntax OUTPut TTLTrg MODE TRIG   FSTR  Parameters TRIG   FSTR    RST Value TRIG   Examples OUTP TTLT MODE FSTR    Query Syntax OUTPut TTLTrg MODE   Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt   Related Commands OUTP TTLT STAT       OUTPut TTLTrg  STATe     This command enables or disables the Trigger Out  FUNCTION STROBE  signal  which is  available at the system interface connector on the rear panel of the AC DC source  Refer to  the User Manual for pin out informat
8.    Related Commands ABOR  TRIG SYNC PHAS INIT   INIT CONT  TRG       TRIGger SYNChronize PHASe    This command sets the phase angle with respect to an internal phase reference if  TRIGger SOURce PHASe is selected  The range is from  360 to  360 Degrees     Command Syntax TRIGger SYNChronize PHASe lt NRf  gt   Parameters 360 to  360    RST Value 0   Examples TRIG SYNC PHAS 90    Query Syntax TRIGger SYNChronize PHASe    Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt    Related Commands ABOR TRIG SYNC SOUR INIT  INIT CONT  TRG       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 122    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    TRIG STATe     This is a query only command  The response will define the state of the transient trigger  system as follows     e IDLE The trigger is in idle state    e ARM The trigger is waiting for internal syncronization or external trigger  e BUSY The triggered transient in progress    e WTRIG The unit is waiting for a trigger event     On Series II controllers  the trigger state will be updated when the last list point has been  executed  For final voltage or frequency steps with a longer dwell time than needed to reach  the end value  this means the response may change from BUSY to IDLE before the dwell  time has expired  If this affects the application program  it will be necessary to add a final list  point with a short durating  e g  0 001 second  to hold the BUSY state till the end of the list     Query Syntax TRIGger STATe   Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt 
9.    Short Form The header has only the first three or four letters  such as    VOLT  STAT  and OUTP   The SCPI interface is not sensitive to case  It will recognize any case mixture  such as  TRIGGER  Trigger  TRIGger  Short form headers result in faster program execution     Header Convention    In the command descriptions in chapter 3 4 of this manual  headers are emphasized with  boldface type  The proper short form is shown in upper case letters  such as DELay     iM Series   i Series     X Series 17    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    Header Separator    If acommand has more than one header  you must separate them with a colon   VOLT LEVel  OUTPut RELay ON      Optional Headers    The use of some headers is optional  Optional headers are shown in brackets  such as  OUTPut  STATe  ON  As previously explained under  The Effect of Optional Headers   if you  combine two or more message units into a compound message  you may need to enter the  optional header     2 4 4 Query Indicator    Following a header with a question mark turns it into a query  VOLTage    VOLTage RANGe    If a query contains a parameter  place the query indicator at the end of  the last header  VOLTage LEVel  MAX      2 4 5 Message Unit Separator    When two or more message units are combined into a compound message  separate the  units with a semicolon  STATus OPERation  QUEStionable       2 4 6 Root Specifier    When it precedes the first header of a message unit  the colon be
10.   DAUSB_Inf      Hardware Installation    A The software you are installing for this hardware   iX AC Source    has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility  with Windows XP   Tell me why this testing is important      Continuing your installation of this software may impair  or destabilize the correct operation of your system  either immediately or in the future  Microsoft strongly  recommends that you stop this installation now and  contact the hardware vendor for software that has  passed Windows Logo testing     STOP Installation         The USB device drivers have not been Windows XP Logo certified  Due to the limited  distribution of these drivers  this is unlikely to be done  This Logo certification has no  bearing on the functionality or legitimacy of this device driver so you can ignore this  message  Click the    Continue Anyway    button to continue  Note that some PCs may have  this verification disabled in which case this screen will not pop up     The installation will now proceed  This process may take several minutes to complete     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 25    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    Found New Hardware Wizard    Completing the Found New  Hardware Wizard    The wizard has finished installing the software for     Sch iX AC Source    Click Finish to close the wizard        Once completed  the dialog box shown above will appear signaling the device drivers have  been installed  The USB interface is 
11.   Example  273   lt NR2 gt  Digits with an explicit decimal point  Example  0273   lt NR3 gt  Digits with an explicit decimal point and an exponent     Example  2 73E 2     lt Bool gt  Boolean Data   Example  0   1 or ON   OFF      Listening Formats     lt Nrf gt  Extended format that includes  lt NR1 gt    lt NR2 gt  and  lt NR3 gt    Examples  273 273 0 2 73E2   lt Nrf  gt  Expanded decimal format that includes  lt Nrf gt  and MIN  MAX     Examples  273  273 0  2 73E2  MAX   MIN and MAX are the minimum and maximum limit values that  are implicit in the range specification for the parameter      lt Bool gt  Boolean Data  Example  0   1    2 5 2 Character Data    Character strings returned by query statements may take either of the following forms   depending on the length of the returned string      lt CRD gt  Character Response Data  Permits the return of character strings     lt AARD gt  Arbitrary ASCII Response Data  Permits the return of undelimited 7 bit  ASCII  This data type has an implied message terminator     lt SRD gt  String Response Data  Returns string parameters enclosed in double  quotes     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 19    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    3  System Considerations       This chapter addresses some system issues concerning programming  These are AC DC  Source addressing and the use of the following IEEE 488 system interface controllers     e National Instruments GPIB controller with the Windows   gpib 32 dll dr
12.   Related Commands FUNC       FUNCtion CSINe  Phase selectable    This command sets the clipping level when a clipped sine output waveform is selected  The  clipping characteristics can be specified as follow     e The clipping level is expressed at the percentage of total harmonic distortion in the  output voltage  The range is O to 20 percent     Command Syntax  SOURce  FUNCtion  SHAPe  CSINusoid lt NRf gt   Parameters 0 to 20     RST Value 0   no clipping    Examples FUNC CSIN 10    Query Syntax  SOURce  FUNCtion  SHAPe  CSINusoid   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   Related Commands FUNC MODE       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 81    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 14 Source Subsystem   Limit    This subsystem controls the voltage frequency and current limit of the power source  These  limits are set at the factory and depends on the power source rating  It is not accessable by  the user  The query format is accessable however     Subsystem Syntax     SOURce    LIMit  FREQuency  lt n1 gt   lt n2 gt   VOLTage  lt n gt   CURRent  lt n gt   PHASe  lt n gt     LIMit FREQuency    This command sets the upper and lower frequncy limit of the power source    Command Syntax  SOURce  LIMit FREQuency  lt NRf gt     lt NRf gt   Parameters low freq limit  upper frequency limit  command protected     Query Syntax  SOURce  LIMit FREQuency   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt    lt NR2 gt        LIMit CURRent    This command will set the maximum AC current limit
13.   X Series 170    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    Command Syntax 1EC411 VARiants  HOLD TIME  lt NRf gt   Parameters  lt seconds gt   Examples IEC411 VAR  HOLD TIME 0 5    Query Syntax 1EC411 VAR  HOLD TIME   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        1IEC411 VARiants HOLD VOLTage  PERCent     This command will set the variant level as a percentage of the nominal volts for the duration  of the hold time     Command Syntax IEC411 VARiants HOLD VOLTage  PERCent   lt NRf gt   Parameters  lt percentage gt    Examples IEC411 VAR  HOLD VOLT 70   Query Syntax 1EC411 VAR  HOLD VOLT    Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        IEC411 VARiants FALL   TIME     This command will set the variant fall time in seconds  Refer to Figure 9 13 in the User  Manual     Command Syntax IEC411 VARiants FALL  TIME   lt NRf gt   Parameters  lt seconds gt    Examples IEC411 VAR FALL 0 5   Query Syntax 1EC411 VAR FALL    Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        IEC411 VARiants RISE   TIME     This command will set the variant rise time in seconds  Refer to Figure 9 13 in the User  Manual     Command Syntax 1EC411 VARiants RISE TIME  lt NRf gt   Parameters  lt seconds gt   Examples IEC411 VAR RISE TIME 0 25    Query Syntax IEC411 VAR RISE  TIME   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 171    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    9 3 IEC 1000 4 13   413 Option     9 3 1 IEC 1000 4 13 Subsystem    The following are the remote commands set
14.   e MEASure triggers the acquisition of new measurement data before returning a reading   e FETCh returns a reading computed from previously acquired data     Individual outputs of a three phase source are specified by the setting of  INSTrument NSELect     Subsystem Syntax  MEASure   FETCh      SCALar    CURRent     AC   Returns ac rms current   DCH Returns dc component of the current    AMPLitude    MAX  Returns peak current  HE Get Reset the peak current measurements    CREStfactor  Returns current crestfactor    HARMonic    AMPLitude    lt n gt  Returns amplitude of the Nth harmonic of current   PHASe   lt n gt  Returns phase of the Nth harmonic of current     THD  Returns   of total harmonic distortion of current    MEASure CURRent  AC    FETCh CURRenit   AC      Phase Selectable    These queries return the ac component rms current being sourced at the output terminals if  the voltage mode is set for AC only  and will return the AC plus the DC component if the  voltage mode is set for ACDC     Query Syntax MEASure  SCALar  CURRent  AC    FETCh  SCALar  CURRent  AC    Parameters None    Examples MEAS CURR AC  FETC CURR   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   Related Commands INST NSEL       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 60    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    MEASure CURRent DC   FETCh CURRent DC     Phase Selectable    These queries return the dc component of the output current being sourced at the output  terminals  This command should be used wh
15.   gt     This command will set the calibration coefficent for the AC full scale output voltage at the  high voltage range and at high output frequency    Command Syntax CALibrate VOLTage HRANge HFRequency  lt NRf  gt   Parameters  lt NRf gt   a value between  127 and  128   Examples CAL VOLT HRAN HFRequency  10    Query Syntax CALibrate VOLTage HRANge HFRequency   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   value range  127 to  128   Related Commands CAL VOLT HRAN ZERO CAL VOLT HRAN       CALibrate  SOURce  VOLTage HFRrequency  lt CRD gt     This query command retrieves the high frequency calibration coefficients for the IEC413  option  Available only on iX Series Il models with firmware revision 4 20 or higher  This query  returns a comma separated list of seven calibration coefficients  These coefficients can only  be set by performing a voltage measurement calibration     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 44    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    Query Syntax CALibrate VOLTage HFRequency     Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt   Related Commands CAL VOLT LRAN ZERO CAL VOLT LRAN HFR       CALibrate  SOURce  IHARmonic    This query command retrieves the interharmonic calibration coefficient for the IEC413  option  Available only on iX Series Il models only  This query returns a comma separated list  of the calibration coefficient and the frequency at which the calibration was performed     Query Syntax CALibrate IHARmonic     Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt   Related C
16.  1EC413 SWEep CURRent RESonant   Parameters none   Query Syntax 1EC413 SWE FREQ RES    Returned Parameters   lt NR2 gt         lt NRn gt        1EC413 HARMonics LEVel    This command will set the level for the harmonics test  The command will accept either one  parameter or a sequence of parameters from the second harmonic to the fortieth harmonic   In case of one parameter  the level will be set for the selected harmonic number specified by  IEC413 INDV HARM NUMBer  The IEC413 STATe must be in the off position and the user  class must be selected to accept the command     Command Syntax IEC413 HARMonics LEVel  lt Nrf  gt     lt Nrf gt       lt Nrfn gt    Parameters 0 to 20   Examples IEC413 HARM LEV 4 5    Query Syntax 1EC413 HARM LEV   Returned Parameters  lt NR23 gt        lt NR2 gt        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 179    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    1EC413 HARMonics PHASe    This command will set the phase angle of the harmonics wave form relative to the  fundamental  The command will accept either one parameter or a sequence of parameters  from the second harmonic to the fortieth harmonic  In case of one parameter  the phase will  be set for the selected harmonic number specified by IEC413 INDV HARM NUMB  The  IEC413 STATe must be in the off position and the user class must be selected to accept the  command     Command Syntax IEC413 HARMonics PHASe  lt Nrf  gt     lt Nrf gt       lt Nrfn gt    Parameters 0 to 360  Examples IEC413 HA
17.  AC Source            AND 16 THEN    x x  Command Execution Error Reported by AC Source                     AND 32 THEN   xxx Command Syntax Error Reported by AC Source                        END IF  LOOP UNTIL cmd     QUIT  OR cmd     quit           iM Series   i Series   iX Series 21    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments     Close COM port on exit  CLOSE  1  END    3 3 2 Serial Cable Diagram    The following wiring diagram is required for the serial interface cable between the AC DC  power source and a PC communications port connector for i iX models that do not have an  USB interface  This cable can be ordered from California Instruments customer service  using P N 7000 263 1        DB 9 PC DB 9 AC Source   Pin Pin Direction Description  1 1 output reserved  2 2 input Receive data RxD   3 3 output Transmit data  TxD   4 4 output Data Terminal Ready  DTR   5 5   Signal Ground  6 6 input Data Set Ready  DSR   7 7   no connect  8 L  8  gt  no connect  9 9 output reserved             Figure 3 1  RS232C Interface Cable Wiring Diagram    2  3  4  5  6  7  8  2  2    IO Pa AD DAN Go    RS232C DB 9 to DB 25 Adapter       Figure 3 2  DB9 to DB25 Adaptor Wiring Diagram    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 22    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    3 4 USB Interface       A standard USB Series B device connector is located on the rear panel for remote control  A  standard USB cable between the AC Source and a PC or USB Hub may be used  Refe
18.  E AR  AC   EE LRANGe  de to  FSCale   A a ZERO  EE HFRequency  EE HRANGe  o adds Aoi  FSCale   ata diia lirica ZERO  TT HFRequency    iM Series   i Series     X Series    194    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    OE  FSCale   EN  POSitive   ER NEGative    EN  FSCale   orale  POSitive   E NEGative    INITiate   aa  IMMediate   cia  TRANsient   old ACQuire   Ads CONTinuous ON   OFF    INSTrument   pho COUPle ALL   NONE  eee NSELect 1 2 3  oke SELect A B C    MEASure   FETCh    Bi Mee rate i aed  DC     AA   A HARMonic   A A AE idl  AMPLitude    EE PHASe    EEN  AMPLitude    hota bce A ad eta PHASe    hees CURRent    dr ht HARMonic  eene See  AMPLitude    lt n gt   ia atico PHASe   lt n gt     to tena  POWer    o dao te  REAL    ic ra APParent   ie PFACtor   A DC    g  ie VOLTage    iM Series   i Series     X Series 195    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    SE  AC    ed DCH  eebe HARMonic  NEEN  AMPLitude    lt n gt   NEE PHASe   lt n gt   Kee AE aa THD   OUTPut   BEN  STATe   lt bool gt    ida PROT CLE   ita RI   EE MODE LATC   LIVE   OFF  E TTLTrg   E EE  STATe   lt bool gt   a SOURce  lt source gt   a IMPedance   ec A  STATe   lt bool gt   ee REAL   Se set lees REACtive   SENSe   EE SWEep   eta OFFSet  lt n gt   EE TINTerval    SOURce    BEE CURRent   idad  LEVel   BEE  IMMediate   Sh taken ea Ne Zeite Sens tet  AMPLitude   BEER PROTection  DEE STATe  TO DELay  Aint FREquency   da  IMMediate   ate MODE   nds TRIGgered  tt SLE
19.  FUNCtON POI  NS iii iii iii chicha 88  LIST FUNGtion    SHAPE itinere eerste de  88  EIST REP Gats POINtS O O 89  BRENNEN 89  ESTS EE 89  HSE Ri He EE 90  LIS ESE TET rg  POINTS  toca o aora 90  MNS TEV OL AGC cinta Sevier nadaa 91  BENEKE LEE 91  EST VOLTSge  EW  tata dad eet 91  LIST  VOLTage SLEW  POINtS  ENNEN 92  M  MAG  ee 32  MEAGure APav CUPentHAPMonc PHADGe   55  MEAGure APav CUPent HAPMonicH  54  MEASure ARRay CURRent           cccccceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeceeeeseaeeesaaesneaeeseaeeesaaeessaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeaeseeeees 54  MEASure ARRay MODG6 oooocconccccocccococinonnccnnnnc cnc 56  MEASure ARRay VOLTage HARMonic PHASOP onmciccccinccnnociconocnnanncccnncnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnrrcnnrnanrrnnnrnn 59  MEAGure APav VOL Tage HAbMonicH  cnn n cnn rca 58  MEASure ARRay  VOL Tage  58  MEASur  e CURRENGAG   eonenna anre a e raa liteesecededvess d  se geet S RANEE EANET TAKUN aar aA ERTAN 60  MEASure CURRent AMPLitude MAXiMUM 2             cccecesceceeeee eee eeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeesaaeeesaaeseeneeseaeeesaeeeeaaeeennees 61  MEAGure CUPent AM de HE Get eee eeeeaeeeeaeeceeeeesaaeeesaaeseeneeseaeeesaeeeeaeeeenees 61  MEASure CURRent CRESttactor           cccccccceceeeceeeeeeeeaeeceeeeeeaeeecaaeeseaeeseeeeecaaeeesaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeseeaeesenees 62  MEASure CURRent  HARMonic PHAS              ccccccceceeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeneeseaeeecaaeeesaaeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeeeaeseenees 63  MEASure CURRent HARMonic   HD    63  MEASure CURRent  HARMONIC             ccccceceesseceseeeceeeceeeeeeeceeeaeeecee
20.  GPIB interface such as ATN  GET and SRQ interrupts do not apply to the  RS232C interface  Baudrates from 9600 to 115200 are supported on units that have both  USB and RS232  For units with only RS232  the maximum baudrate is 38400     To set up the RS232C interface  refer to section 3 3     RS232C Interface        The RS232C interface may be used to install updated firmware for the controller if needed   Firmware updates and a Flash Loader utility program and instructions are available from the  AMETEK Programmable Power website for this purpose   www programmablepower com     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 12    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    2  Introduction to SCPI       SCPI  Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments  is a programming language for  controlling instrument functions over the IEEE 488  SCPI is layered on top of the hardware   portion of IEEE 488 1  The same SCPI commands and parameters control the same  functions in different classes of instruments  For example  you would use the same  MEAS VOLT  command to measure the AC DC source output voltage or the output voltage  measured using a SCPI compatible multimeter     2 1 Conventions Used in This Manual       Angle brackets lt  gt     Vertical bar    Square Brackets      Braces    Boldface font    Computer font    Items within angle brackets are parameter abbreviations  For  example   lt NR1 gt  indicates a specific form of numerical data     Vertical bars separate alternati
21.  MEASure VOLTage TEMPerature DC ZERO  Parameters  lt NRf gt   0 or desired offset value   Examples CAL MEAS VOLT TEMP DC ZERO 0    Query Syntax CALibrate MEASure VOLT DC ZERO   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   value range  20 to  20   Related Commands CALibrate MEASure VOLTage  AMBient  DC ZERO       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 42    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 2 4 Output  Phase    CALibrate PHASe  lt NRf  gt     The i iX Series AC DC power source controller can be operated using its internal timebase  reference  an external clock or in external sync mode   See FREQ MODE command on page  77  When using in external clock or sync mode  it may be desirable to shift the phase output  with respect to the external reference  The feature may be used to create a deliberate phase  offset or to compensate for phase delays that may occur in the external sync signal path   The phase calibration command can be used to program a negative or positive phase offset  for phase in degrees with respect to the external sync  Note that this calibration adjustment  only applies to the external clock or sync for phase A  Phase B and C are always  programmed with respect to phase A and their calibration offset is with respect to phase A   The phase to be calibrated can be selected using the INST NSEL command     The phase offset is expressed in degrees and can range from  360 0 to  360 0 degrees  The  resolution of the phase angle adjustment  0 1     is the same
22.  MODE  The mode command switches the output voltage between the available output modes   Command Syntax  SOURce  MODE    Parameters AC   DC   ACDC  Example MODE AC    Query Syntax  SOURce  MODE   Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt   Related Commands PONS VOLT MODE       4 18 Source Subsystem   Phase    This subsystem programs the output phase angle of the AC DC source  When the phase  command is used to program a single phase unit  the only discernible effect is to cause an  instantaneous shift in the output waveform phase relative to an external reference signal     Subsystem Syntax     SOURce    PHASe    IMMediate   lt n gt  Sets the output phase    PHASe  Phase Selectable    This commands sets the phase of the output voltage waveform relative to an external  reference for single phase power source  Phase B and C in a three phase system are  programmed relative to phase A  The phase angle is programmed in degrees  Positive  phase angles are used to program the leading phase  negative phase angles are used to  program the lagging phase     Command Syntax  SOURce  PHASe  IMMediate   lt NRf  gt   Parameters  360 through  360   RST Value Define by the PONSetup PHASe    Examples PHAS 45  Query Syntax  SOURce  PHASe   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        iM Series   i Series     X Series 93    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 19 Source Subsystem   PONSetup    This subsystem will control the initial condition of the power source at the power on state     
23.  Migger System SUMMA cc aaa 154  7  Status e EE 155  7 1 Power OM CONTAINS otr airada 155  7 2 Operation   Status Group EE 155  7 3 Questionable Status  Group  iure are rol iia pere 158  7 4 Standard Event Status Group    cooocccnnccinocnnonononncncnnnnnnornnnnn nn E e e aan aa ner nn 159  7 5 Status  Byle Registran li tbn 159  7 6 A stiadeasesdacdsdascudasaasdeseghagsabdescsdanessietasdueasdaactidpiagdensets 160  7 7 SCPI Command Completion iiien euir eiin EE O EE E EE E E a 161  8  i Series Controller Compatability                cccsccsseceseeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeeneeeeeeeneeseeseseeeenseeeees 162  8 1 Introduction enn A A ee ee E 162  8 2 Trigger Subsystem pat itt lin pa pi 162  8 3 Measurement Calibration Subsystem           eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteaeeseaeeteaeeseaeeteaeeseaeeteeeeeatete 163  8 4 Detecting i Series Controller Versions 164  8 5 Sample Code   sti  aie sere A eee da deen ee ae 165  9  Option COMMANAS  amp   eis cccssccscececz eee See See 167  9 1 Introduction  nsen i a A ee 167  9 2 IEC 10004 11   41 1 Option  EE 168  9 3 IEC  1 00024 13  413 Option  EE 172  9 4 RIGA DO 1 60D  2160 Option  sucio ds bes Sere celeb ate eee 184  9 5 MIL STD 704E  4704 Option  DEE 190  9 6 Airbus ABD0100 1 8 Tests   ABD Option     192  9 7 Airbus AMD24 Test Option   AMD Option     192  9 8 Airbus A350 Test Option   A350 Option   192  9 9 Boeing B787 0147 Test Option   B787 Option  192  9 10   lOlVIEe ane TEE 193  Appendix A  SCPI Command tree         ccccscccsseeeeneeeee
24.  ON  1EC413 PAUS     lt boolean gt        This command will select the class  There are two predefined classes 2 and 3  Class 1 is  supported through the use of the USER defined class  Other tests levels can be set in the    USER class as well     Command Syntax  Parameters  Examples    Query Syntax  Returned Parameters    iM Series   i Series     X Series    IEC413 CLASs  lt class gt   2 3JUSER  1EC413 CLAS 3  1EC413 CLAS     lt class gt        173    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    IEC413 INDVidual HARMonics  NUMBer     This command is used to set the desired harmonic number when the IEC413 RUN POINt is  used     Command Syntax IEC413 INDVidual  HARMonics  NUMBer   lt NRf gt   Parameters 2 to 40  Examples IEC413 INDV HARM 3    Query Syntax IEC413 INDV HARM   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt        1IEC413 INDVidual IHARMonics  FREQuency     This command is used to set the desired Interharmonic frequency when the IEC413 RUN  POINt is used     Command Syntax IEC413 INDVidual IHARMonics  FREQuency   lt NRf gt   Parameters within frequency range and step size   Examples IEC413 INDV IHARM 400   Query Syntax 1EC413 INDV IHARM    Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt        1EC413 INDVidual SWEep  RANGe     This command is used to set the desired Interharmonic frequency range for the sweep group  or interharmonics group when the IEC413 RUN RANGe is used     Command Syntax 1EC413 INDVidual SWEep  RANGe   lt NRf gt   Parameters 0to4   Examples IEC413 INDVI SWE 0  
25.  Paa ATES Guranda PERiod  lt n gt    TEE TD WIDTh  lt n gt    ETA HOLD WIDTh DCYCle  oain VOLTage   AE  LEVel    E  IMMediate    AAA ibas  AMPLitude    E E E ENEE  AC   lt n gt     EEN OFFset  lt n gt   cd Seemed feats MODE  lt mode gt    Pan E ATRAER TRIGgered  Gees  AMPLitude   lt n gt   ese yr tan hod MODE    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 197    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    EE  LEVel   lt n gt    eg Lee PAIR 135 270   150 300  EE SENSe   ER  SOURce  INTernal   EXTernal    ronda  ete  IMMediate   lt n gt    MAXimum  steet Eege MODE  lt mode gt    id TRIGgered  EE  AMPLitude   lt n gt    MAXimum    STATus  E OPERation  ee ee EVENT  EE CONDition  he Shere aun neces ENABle  lt n gt   PETN QUEStionalbe  ee Eege EVENT  Ee CONDition    el ADDRess    EE Ae  ADDRess  Ee  APPLy  O ATEO  CLASs  eg  DEFault  EELER  DESCription  ee e   DNSaddress  EE  GWADdress  EE    HOST   CR taro ih Een   ADDRess  EE  PASSword    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 198    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    TRACe   poe CATalog    EE  DATA   lt waveform_name gt    lt n gt     lt n gt    O DEFine  lt waveform_name gt    lt waveform_name gt  1024   A DELete   cinta  NAME   lt waveform_name gt     TRiGger   et  TRANsient    i Sete sett atta SOURce IMMediate   BUS  di COUNt NONE   ALL   Atado ACQuire   hetten SOURce IMMediate   BUS   TTLTrg  Atl SYNChronize   Aoi iodo Aen SOURce IMMediate   PHAS  leg PHASe  lt n gt    A STATe     iM Series   i Series
26.  Query Syntax IEC413 INDV SWE    Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt        1EC413 STEP  SIZE     This command is used to set the desired step size for the Interharmonic group and sweep  group as well as the Meister curve  FW 2 37 and higher   The command will accept one  parameter or five parameters  If one parameter is used  the step size for the current range  setting is the only parameter that gets updated     Command Syntax 1EC413 STEP  SIZE   lt NRf  NRf1     NRf4  gt   Parameters query the min and max for range of data  Examples 1EC413 STEP 5    1EC413 STEP 2 5 10 10 50  Query Syntax 1EC413 STEP   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 174    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    1EC413 GROup    This command is used to select the group  If RUN GROUp is used  the test will run for only  the selected group  Note that the MCURve parameter is only supported with FW 2 37 or  higher     Command Syntax IEC413 GROup  lt group gt   Parameters FCURve OSWing SWEep HARMonics IHARmonics   MCURve  Examples 1EC413 GRO SWE    Query Syntax 1EC413 GRO   Returned Parameters  lt group gt        1EC413 FCURve LEVel    This command will set the clip level for the flat curve test  The class must be set prior to this  command  The IEC413 STATe must be in the off position and the user class is selected to  accept the command     Command Syntax 1EC413 FCURve LEVel lt NRf gt   Parameters 15 to 100    Examples 1EC413 FCURve LEVel 10  Query Syntax 1
27.  Register       The outputs of the Questionable Status group are logically ORed into the QUEStionable  summary bit  3  of the Status Byte register     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 158    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    7 4 Standard Event Status Group       This group consists of an Event register and an Enable register that are programmed by  Common commands  The Standard Event register latches events relating to the interface  communication status  See Figure 7 1   It is a read only register that is cleared when read   The Standard Event Enable register functions similarly to the enable registers of the  Operation and Questionable status groups     Command Action     ESE programs specific bits in the Standard Event Enable register      ESR  reads and clears the Standard Event Event register     The PON bit in the Standard Event Event register is set whenever the AC source is turned  on  The most common use for PON is to generate an SRQ at power on following an  unexpected loss of power     7 5 Status Byte Register       This register summarizes the information from all other status groups as defined in the IEEE  488 2 Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation  The bit configuration is  shown in Table 7 2     Command Action    STB  reads the data in the register but does not clear it  returns MSS in bit 6   serial poll reads and clears the data in the register  returns RQS in bit 6    The MSS Bit    This is a real time  unlatc
28.  Series II  microseconds for three phase  models or 15003iX MODE in three phase configuration  The sample interval can be  increased from its minimum value in increments of this minimum value up to 10 times  This  increases the data acquisition window at the expense of sampling resolution  Be aware of  possible aliasing if higher fundamental frequencies are programmed or if higher frequency  harmonics are present in the voltage or current when decreasing the sample rate  See  paragraph 4 15 for command syntax           iM Series   i Series   iX Series 152    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    6 7 2 Pre event and Post event Triggering  iX series only   The range for this offset is     UX Series     104 msec to 1000 msec in single phase mode or  312 msec to 1000 msec  in three phase mode  at the highest available sample rates      UX Series Il   42 6 msec to 1000 msec in single phase mode or  128 msec to 1000 msec  in three phase mode  at the highest available sample rates      As shown in the following figure  when the offset is negative  the values at the beginning of  the data record represent samples taken prior to the trigger  When the value is 0  all of the  values are taken after the trigger  Values greater than zero can be used to program a delay    time from the receipt of the trigger until the data points that are entered into the buffer are  valid      Delay time   Offset x Sample period        Offset      104 msee             4096 DATA POINT
29.  This command will set the GPIB address     Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess  lt NRF gt   Parameters 0 to 31  lt listen address gt     Example SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 2  Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 112    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    SYSTem COMMunicate LAN ADDRess    This command will set the LAN IP address  The query format returns the IP address set  To  query the actual IP address used by the LAN interface  in case the IP address is not static  but assigned by a DHCP server   the NCON parameter  Network Connection Setting  must  be added to the query  The default value is 0 0 0 0     Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN ADDRess  lt NRF gt   Parameters ddd ddd ddd ddd  lt IP address gt   Example SYST COMM LAN ADDR 10 11 26 2    Query Syntax SYST COMM LAN ADDR   SYST COMM LAN ADDR  NCON  Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt        SYSTem COMMunicate LAN APPLy    This command will apply the changes in LAN setting  The controller will go to reset condition  and the new LAN setting will take effect     Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN APPLy  Parameters none   Example SYST COMM LAN APPL   Query Syntax no query for this command   Returned Parameters none       SYSTem COMMunicate LAN CLASs    This command will set the number of host address bits or a class  The query format returns  the number of bits set  To query the actual number of bits used by the LAN interface  in case  the IP address is not 
30.  This means the instrument can  remain in coupled mode while doing measurement queries using    INST  SEL   lt n gt   FETC  VOLT    WAI     Note that when the instrument is subsequently put in the  uncoupled state using    INST COUP NONE     the last issued phase selection will be in effect   To make sure the desired phase is selected  follow the    INST  COUP NONE    command with  an    INST SEL  lt n gt     command                   Command Syntax INSTrument SEL  Parameters A B C  Examples INST SEL A    Query Syntax INST SEL   Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt   Related Commands INST COUP INST NSEL       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 52    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 5 Array Measurement Subsystem  iX series only        This command subsystem lets you retrieve arrays containing measurement data  Only  current and voltage measurements are stored in an array  Two measurement commands are  available  MEASure and FETCh  A MEASure command triggers the acquisition of new data  before returning the readings from the array  A FETCh command returns previously acquired  data from the array     Individual outputs of a three phase source are specified by the setting of  INSTrument NSELect     Subsystem Syntax  MEASure   FETCh     ARRay   CURRent    DC   Returns the digitized instantaneous current   HARMonic    AMPLitude   Returns amplitudes of the first 50 harmonics   PHASe  Returns phase angles of the first 50 harmonics    MODE Selects waveform data tr
31.  UNB  Query Syntax none       DO160 ABNormal VOLTage MINimum    This command will set the voltage to the minimum level for the abnormal operation     Command Syntax DO160 ABNormal VOLTage MINimum  Parameters none   Examples DO160 ABN VOLT MIN   Query Syntax none       DO160 ABNormal VOLTage MAXimum    This command will set the voltage to the maximum level for the abnormal operation     Command Syntax DO160 ABNormal VOLTage MAXimum  Parameters none   Examples DO160 ABN VOLT MAX   Query Syntax none       DO160 ABNormal VOLTage UNDer    This command will set the voltage to the under voltage level for the abnormal operation     Command Syntax DO160 ABNormal VOLTage UNDer  Parameters none   Examples DO160 ABN VOLT UND   Query Syntax none       DO160 ABNormal VOLTage OVER    This command will set the voltage to the surge level for the abnormal operation     Command Syntax DO160 ABNormal VOLTage OVER  Parameters none    Examples DO160 ABN VOLT OVER  Query Syntax none       DO160 ABNormal VOLTage DC LOW    This command will set the voltage to low voltage test for the abnormal operation  Refer to  Section 9 1 of the User Manual     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 188    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    Command Syntax DO160 ABNormal VOLTage DC LOW  Parameters none    Examples DO160 ABN VOLT DC LOW  Query Syntax none       DO160 ABNormal FREQuency TRANsient    This command applies to Group 1 only for the Eurocae standard  Refer to Table 12 in the  User Manual
32.  VOLT SLEW MAX  Query Syntax  SOURce  VOLTage SLEW  IMMediate    Returned Parameters  lt NR3 gt    Related Commands VOLT SLEW MODE VOLT SLEW TRIG       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 104    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    VOLTage SLEW MODE  Phase Selectable    This command determines how the output voltage slew rate is controlled during a triggered  output transient  The choices are     FlXed The slew rate is unaffected by a triggered output transient    STEP The slew rate is programmed to the value set by  VOLTage SLEW TRIGgered when a triggered transient occurs    PULSe The slew rate is changed to the value set by VOLTage SLEW TRIGgered  for a duration determined by the pulse commands    LIST The slew rate is controlled by the voltage slew list when a triggered transient  occurs     Command Syntax  SOURce  VOLTage SLEW MODE lt mode gt    Parameters FlXed   STEP   PULSE   LIST    RST Value FIX   Examples VOLT SLEW MODE LIST VOLT SLEW MODE FIX    Query Syntax  SOURce  VOLTage SLEW MODE   Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt   Related Commands VOLT SLEW TRG VOLT SLEW       VOLTage SLEW TRIGgered  Phase Selectable    This command selects the slew rate that will be set during a triggered step or pulse transient   A parameter of MAXimum will set the slew to its maximum possible rate  The maximum  allowed value is1E9     Command Syntax  SOURce  VOLTage SLEW TRIGgered lt NRf  gt   Parameters O to 1E9   MAXimum   Unit V S  volts per second     RST Value MAXim
33.  a DC offset  setting in effect  while in AC mode     222  Data out of range  Parameter data outside   Check programming manual for  of allowable range  allowable parameter values     223  Too much data  More data received Check programming manual for  than expected number of parameters or data  block size     224  Illegal parameter value  Parameter value is not Check programming manual for  suppored correct parameters     Lists not same length  One or more transient All lists must be of same length  lists programmed has or transient cannot be compiled  different length  and executed       Number    El     254  Media full  No storage space leftto   Delete other settings or data to  save settings or data  make room      Directory full    Too many waveform Delete one or more waveforms    directory entries from waveform memory to  make room      256    File name not found    Waveform requested Check waveform directory for  not in directory waveform names present     iM Series   i Series     X Series 202       AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments          File name error    Incorrect filename Too many or non ASCII  characters used in waveform  file definition        Illegal variable name    Variable name illegal  Use ASCII characters only     Device specific error  Possible causes are  Check for proper mode or  1  Attempt to change command sequence operation    voltage range while  output relay is closed    FW 2 39 or higher    See VOLT RANGE  command   Attemp
34.  allowed  number is not allowed  correct command syntax     168  Block data not allowed  Block data was sent  Check programming manual for       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 201    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments       pCi __f erect commman syntax     Execution error  Command could not be   Command may be inconsistent  executed with mode of operation such as  programming frequency when  in DC mode      Invalid while in local  Command issued but Put instrument in remote state  unit is not in remote before issuing GPIB  state commands      Command protected  Command is locked out   Some commands are  supported by the unit but are  locked out for protection of  settings and are not user  accessible      Trigger error  Problem with trigger Unit could not generate trigger  system  for transient execution or  measurement      Trigger ignored  Trigger request has Trigger setup incorrect or unit  been ignored  was not armed when trigger  was received  Check transient  system or measurement trigger  system settings      Init ignored  Initialization request Unit was told to go to armed  has been ignored state but was unable to do so   Could be caused by incorrect  transient system or  measurement acquisition  setup      Parameter error  Parameter not allowed    Incorrect parameter or  parameter value  Check  programming manual for  allowable parameters     Setting conflict  Requested setting Check other settings  E g   conflicts with other trying to program
35.  and numbers   The display is capable of showing up to 320 characters divided over 8 lines of 40 characters  each  If the string exceeds the display capacity  it will be truncated     Command Syntax DISPlay  WINDow  TEXT  DATA  lt display_string gt   Parameters  lt display string gt    RST Value null string    Examples DISP TEXT  DO TEST1      Query Syntax DISPlay  WINDow  TEXT    Returned Parameters  lt SRD gt   the last programmed string   Related Commands DISP DISP MODE       DISPlay LOCation    This command sets the display pointer to a specific row and column address  Any text send  with the DISP TEXT command will be placed at this location on the display  This command  takes two numeric parameters  row and column  The row range is from 1 through 8  the  column range is from 1 to 40  Thus  the first character position is at 1 1  the last one is at  8 40  If a string is send that is longer than the remaining column positions on a row  it will be  truncated     Command Syntax DISPlay  WINDow  TEXT LOCation  lt row gt   lt column gt   Parameters  lt NR1 gt    lt NR1 gt    RST Value n a    Examples DISP TEXT LOC 2 1  Query Syntax n a  Related Commands DISP MODE   DISP TEXT       iM Series   i Series     X Series 50    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 4 Instrument Subsystem    The Instrument subsystem controls the phase mode of the AC DC power source for  configurations capable of operating in three phase mode     Subsystem Syntax    INSTrument  C
36.  as the one for programming  phase angles  See  SOURce  PHASe command      Command Syntax CALibrate PHASe  lt NRf  gt   Parameters  lt NRf gt   a value between  360 0 and  360 0   Examples CAL PHAS  2 3    Query Syntax CAL PHAS   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   value range  180 0 to  180 0   Related Commands FREQ MODE  SOURce  PHASe INST NSEL       4 2 5 Output  AC Voltage    CALibrate  SOURce  VOLTage  AC  LRANge  FSCale   lt NRf  gt     This command will set the calibration coefficent for the AC full scale output voltage at the low  voltage range     Command Syntax CALibrate VOLTage LRANge  lt NRf  gt    Parameters  lt NRf gt   a value between  127 and  128    Examples CAL VOLT LRAN  2   Query Syntax CALibrate VOLTage LRANge    Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   value range  127 to  128    Related Commands CAL VOLT LRAN ZERO CAL VOLT LRAN HFR       CALibrate  SOURce  VOLTage  AC  LRANge ZERO  lt NRf  gt     This command will set the calibration coefficent for the output voltage offset at the low  voltage range     Command Syntax CALibrate VOLTage LRANge ZERO  lt NRf  gt   Parameters  lt NRf gt   a value between  127 and  128   Examples CAL VOLT LRAN ZERO  10    Query Syntax CALibrate VOLTage LRANge ZERO   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   value range  127 to  128   Related Commands CAL VOLT LRAN CAL VOLT LRAN HFR       CALibrate  SOURce  VOLTage  AC  LRANge HFRequency  lt NRf  gt     iM Series   i Series     X Series 43    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instrume
37.  be output when a list transient is  triggered  Changing list data while a subsystem is in list mode generates an implied ABORT     Command Syntax  SOURce  LIST VOLTage SLEW  lt NRf  gt   lt NRf  gt   Parameters 0 1 to 1E9   MAX   Unit V S  volts per second    Example LIST  VOLT SLEW 10  1E2  MAX    Query Syntax  SOURce  LIST  VOLTage SLEW     Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt    Related Commands LIST  VOLT SLEW POIN  LIST COUN  LIST DWEL LIST STEP       iM Series   i Series     X Series 91    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    LIST  VOLTage SLEW POINts   Phase Selectable    This query returns the number of points specified in LIST  VOLTage SLEW  Note that it  returns only the total number of points  not the point values     Query Syntax  SOURce  LIST  VOLTage SLEW POINts   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt     Example LIST  VOLT SLEW POIN   Related Commands LIST  VOLT SLEW       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 92    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 17 Source Subsystem   Mode    The MODE command allows switching between the different output modes available on the  AC DC power source  The i series provides either AC or DC mode while the ix series adds  AC DC mode as well  When switching modes  the output is automatically set to zero to  prevent hot switching of the output  After a mode command  the output voltage needs to be  programmed to the desired setting     Subsystem Syntax   SOURce    MODE AC DC ACDC Sets the output mode 
38.  between  127 and  128   Examples CAL VOLT DC HRAN ZERO  10    Query Syntax CALibrate VOLTage DC HRANge ZERO   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   value range  127 to  128   Related Commands CAL VOLT DC LRAN       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 47    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 2 7 Output  Impedance    CALibrate  SOURce  REAL  FSCale   lt Nrf  gt     This command will set the calibration coefficent for the real part of the output impedance     Command Syntax CALibrate  SOURce  REAL  FSCale   lt NRf  gt   Parameters  lt NRf gt   a value between 0 and  100   Examples CAL REAL  10    Query Syntax CALibrate  SOURce  REAL  FSCale    Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   value range 0 to  100   Related Commands CALibrate  SOURce  REACtive  FSCale        CALibrate  SOURce  REAL ZERO  lt Nrf  gt     This command will set the lowest real part of the output impedance that could be  programmed     Command Syntax CALibrate  SOURce  REAL ZERO  lt NRf  gt   Parameters  lt NRf gt   a value between 0 and  100   Examples CAL REAL ZERO 100   Query Syntax CALibrate  SOURce  REAL ZERO   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   value range 0 to  100    Related Commands CALibrate  SOURce  REACtive ZERO       CALibrate  SOURce  REACtive  FSCale   lt Nrf  gt     This command will set the calibration coefficent for the reactive part of the output  impedance     Command Syntax CALibrate  SOURce  REACtive  FSCale   lt NRf  gt   Parameters  lt NRf gt   a value between 0 and  300    E
39.  command controls the initiation of the transient generation or measurement  acquisition trigger system  They cause the trigger system to make a transition from the Idle  state to the Waiting for Trigger state  If the trigger system is not in the Idle state  the initiate  commands are ignored     If both the transient generation and the measurement acquisition trigger systems are  initiated at the same time  the first trigger event that occurs will trigger the measurement  system  The transient system will trigger on the next trigger event  Thus  the measurement  system has a higher trigger priority than the the transient system  If the measurement trigger  is generated by a transient event  the acquisition system should be initiated first so it is  waiting for the trigger caused by the transient system     Command Syntax INITiate  IMMediate   TRANsient  Parameters None    Examples INIT  Related Commands ABOR INIT CONT  TRIG       INITiate ACQuire  iX series only     The INITiate ACQuire command controls the initiation of the measurements trigger system   They cause the trigger system to make a measurement from the Idle state to the Waiting for   Trigger state  If the trigger system is not in the Idle state  the initiate commands are ignored     Command Syntax INITiate AC Quire   Parameters None   Examples INIT ACQ   Related Commands ABOR INIT CONT  TRIG       INITiate CONTinuous  These commands control the transient generator trigger system   e 1orONcontinuously initiates th
40.  current measured with external device   Examples CAL MEAS CURR 11 5    Query Syntax CALibrate MEASure CURRent   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   value range  1000 to  1000   Related Commands CALibrate MEASure CURRent TEMPerature  AC   FSCale        CALibrate MEASure CURReni   AMBient  DC  FSCale   lt NRf gt     This command initiates the calibration of the DC current measurement at full scale and at  ambient temperature     Command Syntax CALibrate MEASure CURRent  AMBient  DC  FSCale   Parameters  lt NRf gt   actual load current measured with external device   Examples CAL MEAS CURR DC 11 5   Query Syntax CALibrate MEASure CURRent DC    Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   value range  1000 to  1000    Related Commands CALibrate MEASure CURRent TEMPerature DC  FSCale        CALibrate MEASure CURRent  AMBient  DC ZERO  lt NRf gt     This command initiates the offset adjustment of the DC current measurement at ambient  temperature     Command Syntax CALibrate MEASure CURRent  AMBient  DC ZERO  Parameters  lt NRf gt   0 or desired offset value    Examples CAL MEAS CURR DC ZERO   Query Syntax CALibrate MEASure CURRent DC ZERO    Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   value range  127 to  128    Related Commands CALibrate MEASure CURRent TEMPerature DC ZERO       CALibrate MEASure CURRent TEMPerature   AC   FSCale   lt NRf gt     This command initiates the calibration of the AC current measurement at full scale and at  elevated temperature     Command Syntax CALibrate MEASure CURRent TEMP
41.  downloaded from the AMETEK Programmable Power web site      www programmablepower com      iM Series   i Series   iX Series 32    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments     amp   Interface Configuration    Type  LAN Settings        Simulation mode P Address  fioo D  E  ros      C USB  RS232C Serial    IP Port   5025  C NIIEEE 488 Bus beie j l  Help    Agilent GPIB Verify Connection       Cancel    CLICK VERIFY TO ESTABLISH CONNECTION  Send Command     SC    Receive        Use the    Locate IP    button on the interface configuration screen to bring up the IP configuration utility  screen  To determine what IP address was assigned  select the    Get IP Address from MAC Address  in the Configuration selection  The MAC address should be listed on the serial tag on the back of the  unit  Enter the MAC address and click on    Get IP Address       This process may take several minutes to complete so be patient  If the IP address is found  it will  be displayed below the MAC address  If it can   t be found  all zero   s will be displayed instead    Close the program to return to the GUI interface configuration screen  Then use the    Update IP     button to tranfer the new IP address into the GUI IP Address box  You can also enter the IP address  manually     4 IP Address Configuration       C Get MAC Address from IP Address    Enable DHCP BOOTP    D  C Assign Static IP Address MI California    Get IP Address from MAC Address      MAC Address       oo  20  sa  sa 
42.  driver is distributed on the CIC496 CD ROM  This step is required to use  the included Gui Windows software or other application software through USB     To continue the installation  make sure the CIC496 CD Rom is available  Insert in the CD  ROM drive if needed  If the auto run screen appears  you can close it     Found New Hardware Wizard    Welcome to the Found New  Hardware Wizard    Windows will search for current and updated software by  looking on your computer  on the hardware installation CD  or on  the Windows Update Web site  with your permission      Read our privacy policy    Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for  software     O Yes  this time only    Click Next to continue        When the    Found New Hardware Wizard    dialog appears  select the    No  not this  time    option  The drivers are not available on line  Click on Next button to continue     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 27    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    Found New Hardware Wizard    This wizard helps you install software for     iX AC Source        If your hardware came with an installation CD     or floppy disk  insert it now     What do you want the wizard to do     O Install from a list or specific location  Advanced     Click Next to continue        The next dialog will ask you to install the software for the   X AC Source  Select the    Install  the software automatically  Recommended option and click on Next to continue  If you are  prompted fo
43.  for IEC1000 4 13  The ABORt command will  terminate the test in progress at any time  Test completion can be checked using the    OPC   query if the  OPC 1 command is issued immediately after an IEC1000 4 13 RUN command   Upon completion of the test run   OPC  will return a 1  This may be relevant for ATE    applications in view of long test times     Firmware revision note  Support for the Meister curve test was added with firmware revision  2 37  There are some new commands associated with this test that will only be supported if  the unit you are using has firmware revision 2 37 or higher      1EC413       STATe     RUN    PAUSe   CLASs  lt 2 3 USER gt    INDVidual   HARMonics      NUMber    IHARmonics    FREQuency      SWEep      RANGe      STEP      SIZE      GROUp   FCURve       LEVel   DWELI   PAUSe       MCURve     LEVel   DWELI   PAUSe     OSWing     LEVel    PHASe   DWELI   PAUSe     SWEep     LEVel   DWELI     CURRent      FREQuency    DATA       HARMonics     LEVel    iM Series   i Series   iX Series    Enable or disable the IEC test   Run the IEC test  Pause test    Set the IEC harmonic number    Set the IEC interharmonics frequency   Set the Sweep range   Set sweep step size    Select the IEC group    Set flat curve level    Set flat curve dwell time    Set flat curve pause time   Set mcurve levels    Set mcurve dwell time   Set mcurve pause time   Set over swing level    Set over swing harmonic phase angle   Set over swing dwell time    Set over swing pause ti
44.  for Series II   or an error is generated when the first list  point is triggered  The only exception is a list consisting of only one point  Such a list is  treated as if it had the same number of points as the other lists  with all of the implied points  having the same value as the one specified point     MODE commands such as VOLTage MODE LIST are used to activate lists for specific  functions  However  the LIST DWELI command is active whenever any function is set to list  mode  Therefore  LIST DWELI must always be set either to one point  or to the same  number of points as the active list     Subsystem Syntax     SOURce    LIST   COUNt  lt n gt    MAXimum Sets the list repeat count   DWELI  lt n gt    lt n gt  Sets the list of dwell times   POINts  Returns the number of dwell list points   FREQuency    LEVel   lt n gt    lt n gt  Sets the frequency list   POINts  Returns the number of frequency points     SLEW  lt n gt    lt n gt  Sets the frequency slew list   POINts  Returns the number of frequency slew points   FUNCtion    SHAPe   lt shape gt   lt shape gt Sets the waveform shape list   POINts  Returns the number of shape points   REPeat    COUNt   lt n gt   lt n gt  Set the repeat count for each data points    POINts  Returns the number of repeat for each data points    STEP ONCE   AUTO Defines whether list is dwell  or trigger paced     TTLTrg  lt bool gt    lt bool gt  Defines the output marker list   POINts  Returns the number of output marker list points   VOLTa
45.  for n  can be up to 10 000  All are expressed in   of U1  Note that the IEC 61000 4 13 shows only  two frequency ranges in the Meister curve table but the  413 option separates the third  range in two ranges resulting in 5 instead of 4 parameters  Set both parameter 3 and 4 to the  same value to match the IEC standard table   See table for reference                                    IEC Frequency Class X  413 Frequency Class X  Range Test Levels Option   Range Test Levels  0 33xf1 to 2xf1 Open 0 33xf1 to 2xf1 Parameter 1  2xf1 to 10xf1 Open 2xf1 to 10xf1 Parameter 2  10xf1 to 20xf1 Open 10xf1 to 15xf1 Parameter 3  15xf1 to 20xf1 Parameter 4  20xf1 to 40xf1 Open 20xf1 to 40xf1 Parameter 5                            1EC413 MCURve LEVel lt NRf gt   0 to 20  0 to 10 000  1EC413 MCURve LEVel 10 5 4500 4500 5000    Command Syntax  Parameters  Examples   Query Syntax  Returned Parameters    1EC413 MCURve LEVel    lt NR2 gt        IEC413 MCURve DWELI    This command will set the dwell time in seconds for the meister curve test  The class must  be selected prior to this command  Query with min and max to find the range of dwell time   The default is 10 seconds  This value may not be enough to cover the 5 minutes required by  the test for each range  The user must coordinate the step size with the dwell time to  generate the test period for each frequency range    Command Syntax 1EC413 MCURve DWELI  lt NRf  gt   Parameters   IEC413 MCURve DWEL 20  IEC413 MCURve DWEL    lt NR1 gt     
46.  format  returns the DNS address set  To query the actual DNS address used by the LAN interface   in case the IP address is not static but assigned by a DHCP server   the NCON parameter   Network Connection Setting  must be added to the query  The default value is 0 0 0 0     Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN DNSaddress  lt NRF gt    Parameters ddd ddd ddd ddd  lt Domain Server address gt    Example SYST COMM LAN DNS 10 11 1 1   Query Syntax SYST COMM LAN DNS   SYST COMM LAN DNS  NCON   Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt        SYSTem COMMunicate LAN GW ADdress    This command will set the LAN Gateway address  The query format returns the Gateway  address set  To query the actual gateway address used by the LAN interface  in case the IP  address is not static but assigned by a DHCP server   the NCON parameter  Network  Connection Setting  must be added to the query  The default value is 0 0 0 0     Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN GWADodress  lt NRF gt    Parameters ddd ddd ddd ddd  lt Gateway address gt    Example SYST COMM LAN GWAD 10 11 0 1   Query Syntax SYST COMM LAN GWAD   SYST COMM LAN GWAD  NCON   Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt        SYSTem COMMunicate LAN HOST  This command will set the Host name  The name is limited to 16 characters  Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN HOST  lt SRD gt     Parameters  lt SRD gt   Example SYST COMM LAN HOST    ACS       Query Syntax SYST COMM LAN HOST   Returned Parameters  lt SRD gt        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 114
47.  from 1 to 16  offset is from 0 to 15    Examples MEAS ARR VOLT  FETC ARR VOLT    Returned Parameters 4096 data points in arbitrary block data format   Related Commands INST NSEL SENS SWE       MEASure ARRay VOLTage HARMonic    lt nrf gt    FETCh ARRay VOLTage HARMonic    lt nrf gt      Phase Selectable    These queries return an array of harmonic amplitudes of output voltage in rms volts  The first  value returned is the dc component  the second value is the fundamental frequency  and so  on up to the 50th harmonic  Harmonic orders can be measured up to the fundamental  measurement bandwidth of the measurement system     UX Series    25 6 microseconds for single phase mode and 76 8 microseconds for three   phase mode   UX Series Il  10 4 microseconds for single phase mode and 31 2 microseconds for three   phase mode     Thus  the maximum harmonic that can be measured is dependent on the output frequency   Any harmonics that represent frequencies greater than above frequencies are returned as 0     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 58    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    Query Syntax MEASure ARRay VOLTage HARMonic  AMPLitude     lt nrf gt    FETCh ARRay VOLTage HARMonic  AMPLitude     lt nrf gt    Parameters None    Examples MEAS ARR VOLT HARM  FETC ARR VOLT HARM   Returned Parameters 51 NR2 values  Related Commands INST NSEL       MEASure ARRay VOLTage HARMonic PHASe    lt nrf gt    FETCh ARRay VOLTage HARMonic PHASe    lt nrf gt      Phase Selectabl
48.  gt   ND  Parameters 0 001 to 9E4 MINimum MAXimum  Unit S  seconds   Examples LIST DWEL  1  5 1 5  Query Syntax  SOURce  LIST DWEL   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   Related Commands LIST FREQ LIST TTLT LIST  VOLT       LIST DWELI POINts     This query returns the number of points specified in LIST DWELI  Note that it returns only  the total number of points  not the point values     Query Syntax  SOURce  LIST DWELI POINts   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt     Example LIST DWEL POIN   Related Commands LIST DWELI       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 86    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 16 3 List   Frequency  LIST FREQuency    This command sets the sequence of frequency list points  The frequency points are given in  the command parameters  which are separated by commas  The order in which the points  are entered determines the sequence in which they are output when a list is triggered     Command Syntax  SOURce  LIST FREQuency  LEVel  lt NRf  gt   lt NRf  gt   Parameters Values limited to the frequency range   Unit HZ  Hertz    Examples LIST FREQ 60 65 70    Query Syntax  SOURce  LIST FREQ    Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt    Related Commands LIST FREQ POIN  LIST COUN LIST DWEL  LIST STEP LIST FREQ SLEW       LIST FREQuency POINts     This query returns the number of points specified in LIST FREQuency  Note that it returns  only the total number of points  not the point values     Query Syntax  SOURce  LIST FREQ  LEVel  POINts   Returned Paramet
49.  gt  Register value    Related Commands STAT OPER EVEN       Bit Configuration of Questionable Registers    Bit  Position    ll a PK A  used    mwn   ae    pelo    EES       VF over or under voltage protection has tripped  CF over current protection has tripped   OT over temperature protection has tripped   RI remote inhibit is active   CL rms current limit is active    iM Series   i Series     X Series 107    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    STATus QUEStionable  EVENt      This query returns the value of the Questionable Event register  The Event register is a read   only register which holds  latches  all events  Reading the Questionable Event register  clears it     Query Syntax STATus QUEStionable  EVENt    Parameters None    Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt  Register Value   Examples STAT QUES EVEN   Related Commands  CLS       STATus QUEStionable CONDition     This query returns the value of the Questionable Condition register  This is a read only  register which holds the real time  unlatched  questionable status of the AC DC power  source     Query Syntax STATus QUEStionable CONDition   Example STAT QUES COND   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt  Register value        STATus QUEStionable ENABle    This command sets or reads the value of the Questionable Enable register  This register is a  mask for enabling specific bits from the Questionable Event register to set the questionable  summary  QUES  bit of the Status Byte register  This bit  bit 3  i
50.  interface configuration must be set to use a baud rate of 460 800  If everything is working it  will look like this     cr C  WINDOWS system32 command com    C  DOCUME   L HERMANDping 1606 16 1 198  Pinging 100 10 1 198 with 32 bytes of data     Reply from 100 10 1 198  time lt ims TTL 64  Reply from 100 10 1 198  time lt ims TTL 64  Reply from 100 10 1 198  time lt ims TTL 64  Reply from 166 16 1 198  time lt ims TTL 64    Ping statistics for 166 18 1 198    Packets  Sent   4  Received   4  Lost         z loss gt    Approximate round trip times in milli seconds    Minimum   Bms  Maximum   BMms  Average   Bms    C    DOCUME   1  HERMAN gt  m       Figure 3 6  Pinging AC Source LAN IP address     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 34    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4  SCPI Command Reference       4 1 Introduction       Related Commands    Where appropriate  related commands or queries are included  These are listed because  they are either directly related by function  or because reading about them will clarify or  enhance your understanding of the original command or query     Subsystem commands    Subsystem commands are specific to AC DC source functions  They can be a single  command or a group of commands  The groups are comprised of commands that extend  one or more levels below the root  The description of common commands follows the  description of the subsystem commands     The subsystem command groups are listed in alphabetical order and 
51.  is also supplied with the power source     Note  If a USB cable is plugged into the USB interface connector of the  power source  the RS232 interface will be disabled  Remove any USB  connection to use the RS232 port     3 3 1 Serial Communication Test Program    The following sample program written in GW BASIC can be used to check communication to  the i Series source over the RS232C serial interface      California Instruments i  ix Series RS232C Communication Demo Program    c  1995 Copyright California Instruments  All Rights Reserved    This program is for demonstration purposes only and is not to be   used for any commercial application     OPEN COM2  Replace with COM1  COM3 or COM4 for Com port used   The input and output buffers are set to 2K each although     this is not required for most operations    OPEN  COM2 9600 n 8 1 BIN TB2048 RB2048  FOR RANDOM AS  1   CLS  PRINT       INTERACTIVE MODE          Enter and endless loop to accept user entered commands  DO       INPUT  Enter AC Source Command   quit  to exit    gt     cmd   IF cmd   lt  gt   QUIT  AND cmd   lt  gt   quit  THEN  PRINT  1  cmd    CHRS  10    IF INSTR cmdS       THEN  PRINT  1  CHRS  4    LINE INPUT  1  response   PRINT response   END IF   Check for Errors after each command is issued  PRINT  1    ESR     CHR   10    PRINT  1  CHR   4    LINE INPUT  1  esr   esr    VAL esr   AND 60  AND 4 THEN       Query Error Reported by AC Source         AND 8 THEN    x x  Instrument Dependent Error Reported by
52.  numeric gt   Examples 1EC411 DIPS VOLT 20    Query Syntax 1EC411 DIPS VOLT   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 169    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    1EC411 DIPS ANGLe    This command sets the start phase angle for the dips     Command Syntax 1EC411 DIPS ANGLe  Parameters  lt numeric gt   Examples 1EC411 DIPS ANGL 90    Query Syntax 1EC411 DIPS ANGL   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        1EC411 STATe    This command will enable the IEC411 option and initialize the associated data     Command Syntax IEC411 STATe  lt state gt   Parameters  lt ON OFF gt    Examples 1EC411 STAT ON  Query Syntax 1EC411 STAT   Returned Parameters  lt boolean gt        1EC411 VARiants RUN  ALL     This command will cause the variants automated test sequence by the standard to run   Refer to Table 14 in the User Manual     Command Syntax 1EC411  VARiants RUN  ALL   Parameters  lt none gt    Examples 1EC411 VAR RUN   Query Syntax none   Returned Parameters  lt none gt        1EC411  VARiants RUN SINGle    This command will run a single variant test once  The test is defined by the variants  parameters voltage  cycle and angle     Command Syntax 1EC411 VARiants RUN SINGle  Parameters  lt none gt   Examples 1EC411 VAR RUN SING    Query Syntax none  Returned Parameters  lt none gt        1EC411 VARiants HOLD TIME    This command will set the variant hold time in seconds  Refer to Figure 9 13 in the User  Manual     iM Series   i Series   
53.  o2  D4  ug fio fa Ss    Get IP Address D    The same IP Configuration utility can be used to set the power source LAN option to either static IP  or DHCP IP mode  See the on line help for futher instructions        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 33    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    3 5 3 Socket Port Number    Now that a connection has been verified  you can develop your application code  If you are  using one of the Microsoft environments  the Winsock protocol  which is part of the Windows  operating system can be used  Similar capabilities are supported on other operating  systems     To use Winsock  your will have to specificy the port number of the power source   s LAN  interface  The port number determines the protocol for the communication  The power  source uses ASCII characters and instrument SCPI commands for remote control  The  IANA registered Port number for the Instrument SCPI interface is 5025     TCP Remote port   5025  The port numbe is factory set to 5025     3 5 4 IP Ping    You can also test the IP address from your Windows PC  An easy way to do so is to use the  ping utility under MS DOS  To do so  bring up a DOS window using the start menu     Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt   At the command prompt type  ping  lt IP address gt      This will send an IP ping request to the power source  For this to work  the power source  must be turned on and connected to the same network as the PC  Also  the power source 
54.  or replace the Product  or issue a credit note for the defective Product  or provide  the Buyer with replacement parts for the Product     The Buyer will  at its expense  return the defective Product or parts thereof to AMETEK in  accordance with the return procedure specified below  AMETEK will  at its expense  deliver the  repaired or replaced Product or parts to the Buyer  Any warranty of AMETEK will not apply if the  Buyer is in default under the Purchase Order Agreement or where the Product or any part thereof     e is damaged by misuse  accident  negligence or failure to maintain the same as  specified or required by AMETEK     e is damaged by modifications  alterations or attachments thereto which are not  authorized by AMETEK     e   is installed or operated contrary to the instructions of AMETEK   e is opened  modified or disassembled in any way without AMETEK   s consent  or  e is used in combination with items  articles or materials not authorized by AMETEK     The Buyer may not assert any claim that the Products are not in conformity with any warranty until  the Buyer has made all payments to AMETEK provided for in the Purchase Order Agreement   PRODUCT RETURN PROCEDURE    Request a Return Material Authorization  RMA  number from the repair facility  must be done in  the country in which it was purchased      e Inthe USA  contact the AMETEK Repair Department prior to the return of the  product to AMETEK for repair     Telephone  800 733 5427  ext  2295 or ext  24
55.  power on state  VOLT 120 Set initial output voltage  immediate level   FREQ 60 Set initial output frequency  OUTP ON Enable the output  VOLT MODE PULS Enable output to generate pulses when triggered  VOLT  TRIG 0 Set the voltage dropout  triggered level   PULS WIDT  03333 Set pulse width for 2 periods  PULS PER 0 0667 Set pulse period for 4 cycles  TRIG SOUR BUS Respond to IEEE 488 bus triggers  TRIG  SYNC  SOUR  PHAS Synchronize triggers to internal phase reference  TRIG SYNC PHAS 90 Sets internal phase reference point to 90 degrees  INIT Set to Wait for trigger state    lt device trigger gt  Send the IEEE 488 bus trigger    iM Series   i Series     X Series 141    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    6 4 3 List Transients    List mode lets you generate complex sequences of output changes with rapid  precise  timing  which may be synchronized with internal or external signals  Each function that can  participate in output transients can also have an associated list of values that specify its  output at each list point     You can program up to 32 settings  or points  in the list  the time interval  dwell  that each  setting is maintained  the number of times each data point is repeated  the number of times  that the list will be executed  and how the settings change in response to triggers     All list point data can be stored in nonvolatile memory using one of the available setup  register  This means that the programmed data for any list function wi
56.  range changing to the voltage range value set in the initial setup  Refer to the  PONSetup VRANge command listed in the PONSetup system  section 4 19     Command Syntax  SOURce  VOLTage RANGe PAIR  lt NRf  gt   Parameters 135  270   150 300      RST Value Defined by the PONSetup RANGe  Examples VOLT RANG PAIR 135 270    Query Syntax  SOURce  VOLTage RANGe PAIR   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   Related Commands VOLT RANG VOLT PONS VRAN       VOLTage SENSe  SOURce     This command selects the source from which the output voltage is sensed  The following  voltage sense sources can be selected     INTernal This senses the voltage at the output of the power amplifier on the in board  side of the output disconnect relay   EXTernal This senses the output voltage at the user s sense terminals  which allows    remote voltage sensing at the load     Command Syntax  SOURce  VOLTage SENSe  SOURce   lt source gt   Parameters INTernal   EXTernal    RST Value INTernal   Examples VOLT SENS SOUR INT   Query Syntax  SOURce  VOLTage SENSe  SOURce    Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt        VOLTage SLEW  Phase Selectable    This command sets the slew rate for all programmed changes in the output voltage level of  the source  A parameter of MAXimum will set the slew to its maximum possible rate  The  SCPI representation for MAXimum is 1E9     Command Syntax  SOURce  VOLTage SLEW  IMMediate  lt NRf  gt   Parameters 0 to1E9   MAX   Unit V S  volts per second     RST Value MAX    Examples VOLT SLEW 1
57.  recommend you use  this driver to develop your code     3 2 2 National Instruments GPIB Controllers    Either the native NI gpib 32 dll or the VISA drivers may be used to interface to these  controllers  If you are using LabView    or LabWindows     make sure to select the correct  controller when installing the IDE program  Prior to running any applications programs  you  must set up the GPIB controller hardware with the configuration program located in the  Windows Control Panel  For plug and play versions of the GPIB card  the setup will be  performed when the card is first detected     Regardless of the GPIB interface controller used  the power supply expects a message  termination on EOI or line feed  so set EOI w last byte of Write     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 20    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    3 3 RS232C Interface       i iX power sources that have an RS232 interface but no USB interface use a special cable to  connect to a 9 pin PC serial port  The cable is marked    SOURCE    on one end and    PC    on  the other end and the orientation of the cable is important  The required serial cable is  supplied with the source  If you are unable to locate this cable  you need to use a cable that  conforms to the wiring diagram shown in Figure 3 1     i iX power source that have both RS232 and USB interfaces use a standard straight through  DB9 to DB9 serial cable  The orientation of the cable is not important  This cable  Cl P N  250709 
58.  reference  An error will occur if exactly 1024 data points are not sent with the  command     Data points can be in any arbitrary units  The AC source scales the data to an internal format  that removes the dc component and ensures that the correct ac rms voltage is output when  the waveform is selected  You cannot use the predefined names as names for your  waveform     Waveform data is stored in nonvolatile memory and is retained when input power is  removed  Up to 50 user defined waveforms may be created and stored per group  The  RST  and  DCL commands have no effect on user defined waveforms  Be careful when using the   RCL command to make sure the waveform group that was selected when the front panel  setup was stored is the same  If not  the AC DC power source will attempt to recall a  waveform that likely does not exist in the presently selected group of waveforms  In this  case  an error message is generated and no switching of the waveform at the output of the  source takes place     A waveform can be selected for output using the FUNCtion SHAPe   FUNCtion SHAPe TRIGgered  or LIST SHAPe commands     Command Syntax  TRACe  DATA  lt waveform_name gt   lt NRf gt     lt NRf gt    Parameters  lt waveform_name gt    lt amplitude gt   Example TRAC flattop 0 1 0 3 0 7       0 7  0 3  0 1    Query Syntax  none  Related Commands TRAC DATA  TRAC DEL FUNC SHAP       iM Series   i Series     X Series 117    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    TRACe CATal
59.  return to    the Idle state  Thus it will be necessary to initiate the system each time a triggered  acquisition is desired     Note  You cannot initiate measurement triggers continuously  Otherwise  the  measurement data in the data buffer would continuously be  overwritten by each triggered measurement     6 6 10 Selecting the Measurement Trigger Source    The trigger system is waiting for a trigger signal in the Initiated state  Before you generate a  trigger  you must select a trigger source  To select the SYNC Trigger to start the  measurement at specific phase angles in the waveform    TRIGger ACQuire SOURce SYNC   TRIGger SYNC SOUR PHAS   TRIGger SYNC PHASE 0       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 150    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    To select IEEE 488 bus triggers  group execute trigger  device trigger  or    TRG command    use     TRIGger ACQuire SOURce BUS  To select the signal driving the Trigger Out from the transient  use     TRIGger ACQuire SOURce TTLTrg    6 6 11 Generating Measurement Triggers    Providing that you have specified the appropriate trigger source  you can generate triggers  as follows     e By sending one of the following over the IEEE 488   e TRIGger ACQuire IMMediate  e  TRG  e agroup execute trigger  GET   e By waiting for a specific phase angle of the waveform  e By generating an output transient that causes the Trig Out to output a pulse     e By pressing the front panel START soft key in the HARMONICS WAVEFORM
60.  the power source will operate at in the  low voltage AC range     Command Syntax  SOURce  LIMit CURRent  lt NRf gt    Parameters maximum current limit at low voltage range  command  protected    Query Syntax  SOURce  LIMit CURRent    Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        LIMit VOLTage    This command will set the maximum voltage the power source will operate at in the high  voltage AC range     Command Syntax  SOURce  LIMit  VOLTage lt NRf gt   Parameters maximum current limit at low voltage range  command    protected   Query Syntax  SOURce  LIMit  VOLTage   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 82    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    LIMit PHASe    This command will configure the power source controller for the number of output phases  A  value of zero will configure the source as a single phase unit  A value of 120   will configure  the power source controller as a three phase unit with a 120   phase offset between phase    A  B and C  Any other value will configure the controller as a two phase unit using phase A  and C     Command Syntax  SOURce  LIMit PHASe lt NRf gt   Parameters 0 to 360  command protected     Query Syntax  SOURce  LIMit PHASe   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 83    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 15 Sense Subsystem   Sweep  iX series only     This subsystem controls the measurement current range  the data acquire sequence  a
61.  the wizard           29    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    The USB to Com virtual port is now available to the PC   s operating system  To complete the  install process  click on the    Finish    button  To verify the virtual com port is available  you can  access the Windows System Properties screen  select the Hardware tab and open the  Windows Device Manager screen  The USB redirector should be listed under    Ports  COM   amp  LPT     as shown in the image below  The com port number is automatically assigned  Note  the com port number for subsequent reference in your application software or when selected  the COM port in the Gui Interface screen  This port number may be changed by opening the  USB redirector properties and clicking on Port Settings  then Advanced  and selecting which  port to use from the COM Port number drop down box      amp  Device Manager  File Action View Help  ez D E   eA    A  SOTEC3120X  w Batteries   d Computer  S   Disk drives    Display adapters   lt 3 DVD CD ROM drives  l  IDE ATA ATAPI controllers  19 Keyboards  15  Mice and other pointing devices  d lo Modems   5 Monitors    n adapters  S   ix AC Source     E Network adapters  B   SIS 900 PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter    RB OEM Port 1 0 Device Driver  D PCMCIA adapters       F Ports  COM  amp LPT   J USB   Serial Port  COMS        Processors     EI Sound  video and game controllers                                    Figure 3 4  Windows XP Device Manager     Virtual C
62.  when the  unit is operating in local mode     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 151    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    6 7 Controlling the Instantaneous Voltage and Current Data Buffers       Measurements taken by the AC DC power source are based on a digital representation of  the voltage and current waveforms  Both waveforms are digitized with 18 bits of amplitude  resolution and 25 6 usec of time resolution   49Ks sec real time sampling rate  for single  phase configuration  The available memory depth to hold this information is 4K  4096  samples  for each waveform  This section covers the SCPI commands that can be used to  control the position of the trigger point in the 4K deep data buffer     6 7 1 Query the Voltage and Current Sampling Rate    X series only     The output voltage and current sampling rate is     UX Series    39 kHz  period   25 6 usec  for single phase configuration  This means that  it takes about 104 milliseconds to fill up 4096 data points in the voltage and current data  buffers with the information required to make a measurement calculation     i iX Series Il  96 kHz  period   10 4 usec  for single phase configuration  This means that  it takes about 42 6 milliseconds to fill up 4096 data points in the voltage and current data  buffers with the information required to make a measurement calculation     You can query this data sampling rate with   SENSe  SWEep  TINTerval     The sample period is 76 8  Series ll  or 31 2 
63. 0  Assigning the IEEE 488 Address    20  GPIB Gontrollers   ado lata 20  RS232C Interface EE 21  USB Interface soon lc Tar E a EA ees Ted 23  LAN  Interface OPU a li lirios lc lee ke A bp 32  SCPI Command Reference          cssccsseccsseeeeeseeesneeeeseeeeneeeeseneseseaeeaseeeeeeneeseeseseaeeeseeeeees 35  Introduccion aida tae Bien ee eee 35  Kalfront eier att tcs 36  Display  SUDS VS Mita ita a 49  A   eege eege ea anA ERa a Eaa e a PaE EA ARES ESER 51  Array Measurement Subsystem  iX series only  53  Current Measurement Subsystem   oooooncccccccccnocononcconcononcnnnnnnnon cn ran nn ran cnr nn nr rara nr 60  Frequency Measurement Subsystem    ooooocccnccccnociconcccnonacanoncnnncnnnnn conc cnn nc ronca nr 64  Power Measurement Subsystem             ccccsceeseceeeeeeeeeeteseeeeaeeteaeeeeaeeseaeeseaeeseaeeseaeeseaeeseaeeteeeeseesenes 65  Voltage Measurement Subsystem         ceeeeeeceeeneeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeteaeeeeaeeseaeeseaeessaeeseaeeseaeeseaeeseieeeneetias 67  Output    Subsystem    iit lle sede Nei edie A da 70  Source Subsystem   Current caia 75  Source Subsystem   Frequency EEN 77  Source Subsystem   Function  iX Series only           ceceeeceeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeeeeeesteeeeaes 80  Source Subsystem  lt LiMibindioncact ii cite Ade AE 82  Sense Subsystem   Sweep  iX series only  84  Giele EE DEE 85  source  Subsystem    MOde EE 93  Source Subsystem POS Coin a a ee ered N E E iE 93  Source Subsystem   PONSetup cistitis 94  Source Subsystem   Pulse sa
64. 15  SYSTem COMMunicate LAN PORT            0 0c0c0ccseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 115  GvVGTemCOMMunicate GEPDalBAUID 116  SYSTem COMMunicate SERial  BIG    116  GvVGTemCGOMMunicate GEPal PA    116  SYSTem COMMunicate SERial SBITS                0c0ccccceceseeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 116  ENER E Elte UTC 111  SYSTE ERRO  ii A eng ENNEN 110  SAS TO ET IMC ii A Neue Een Mera 112  AS BEE 111  SS TemiREMOTE  muii AAA Mera e 111  SYSTEM VERSION RE 111  T  Table O COMES  O ee 6  TCP IP    Paddel a lar adas noes 32  Sei dl ie  a 34  iMac lis nicas aids 18   DEIER eege a 117  TRACS CA le nac acne eine a coros codes as 118  TRACES  DE FING  uz da 118  Re RT BEE 118  TRAC e DEL Cte ALL an a 118  TRIG  S WEE 123  Trigger Out  de Te E 72    iM Series   i Series     X Series 212    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    THlGger ACOuire  GCOUlce noc nnnnn cnc rca 122  TRIG ger  COUNT ici a da 121  TRIGger SYNChronize PHASO ooococococcconococoncccnonnnnnonnnnnn cnn cnn nora 122  TRIGger SYNChronize SOURCE cocococcconocononccononcnononcnnno cnn nro nan nn nano nn c anna rara nr rra nnn cnn 122  TRIGger  TRANSient    SOURCE c oooconoccconococonccononnnononcnnnocnnnn cn nn cnn rre 121  U  USB   ODER pee a ede EE  each 23  User Mantilla 9  Vv  VB sample   Welt  CONVE ION iia ile 56  VOLTA a a e ci ode el IEA A LE 101  VO ET age  le 102  KEE le RANGO o e Aa 103  VOETage RANGE PA Risa a a 
65. 3 SWE DWEL 200   Query Syntax 1EC413 SWE DWEL    Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt        1EC413 SWEep CURRent  DATA      This command will return the measured harmonic current  This data is available after the  sweep is completed     Command Syntax IEC413 SWEep CURRent  DATA    Parameters none   Query Syntax IEC413 SWE CURR    Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        lt NRn gt        1EC413 SWEep FREQuency  DATA    This command will return the frequency data points that correspond to the harmonic current  data points  This data is available after the sweep is completed     Command Syntax 1EC413 SWEep FREQuency   Parameters none    Query Syntax IEC413 SWE CURR FREQ   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt         lt NRn gt        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 178    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    1EC413 SWEep CURRent RESonant     This command will return the measured harmonic resonant current  This data is available  after the sweep is completed  If no resonant current is found  the command will return a null  char     Command Syntax IEC413 SWEep CURRent RESonant   Parameters none    Query Syntax 1EC413 SWE CURR RES   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        lt NRn gt        1EC413 SWEep FREQuency RESonant     This command will return the frequency resonant data points that correspond to the  harmonic current data points  This data is available after the sweep is completed  If no  resonant current is found  the command will return a null char     Command Syntax
66. 5    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    Index  PE aa         Ka   CLS want apa an a a Ga aR a le ela aed 125   EGE wrstadasecutg Misletiase en viii tie eee ata 125  A E reine career ero Peer EE 126  A O Ah aras fs 126  POPC sok e te ta thn ela et atte ea etal ies tae i a es Ls 126  POP Tess ed tend Sad a o RR Le bea eege e nae Ataris le 127  NEE a e thn e et atte A ies ahaa ab ee a ra La 128  Nie ces H 128  PERO  viel kbar EN 129  POA octet netted a tend Ocal a tea e ine ccna a eg 130  MORE a ati ae teat eed tea tee hn hed ta had ola ts ab A 130  SMA tbat aa head A EE 131  WEE 131  WA Heal atta a ate ee ae eta ee ah eae eda oes ete 132     TSOUlPcetfHAbmontce CGOUple 182    SOURce  IHARmonics FREQUBNCY             ccceecceeseeceeneeceeeeecaeeeeaaeseeaeeseaeeecaaeeeeaaeseeeeeseeeesaeeeeaeeeeaes 182  TSOUlPcetfHAbmontce HE Ference  183  TSOUlPcetHAbmontceGTATe A 182    SOURCe  IHARMONnICS  VOLT Qe coooooconcccconcccnoninononananoccnnn cn nan nnn anna 183  7  EAR ele Le RE 191  A  A350 option   COMM ANS EE 193  ABD option   COMIMANGS ruralidad 193  E 119  address   IEEE tania tata li did 11  AMD option   COMIMANGS EE 193  B  B787 option   COMIMANIGS dencia 193  C  CALibrate MEASure CURRent DC ZERO ND  39  CALibrate MEASure CURRent TEMPerature DC ZERO NDT  40  CALibrate MEASure CURRent TEMPerature DC  FSCale  ND  40  CALibrate MEASure CURRent TEMPerature  AC   FSCale   lt NRP gt       ssssssssesssessressressrnssrnssrnssrnssrnssns 39  CALibrate MEASure CUR
67. 63  toll free North America   858 450 0085  ext  2295 or ext  2463  direct     e Outside the United States  contact the nearest Authorized Service Center  ASC   A  full listing can be found either through your local distributor or our website   www programmablepower com  by clicking Support and going to the Service Centers  tab     When requesting an RMA  have the following information ready   e Model number  e Serial number  e Description of the problem    NOTE  Unauthorized returns will not be accepted and will be returned at the shipper s expense     NOTE  A returned product found upon inspection by AMETEK  to be in specification is subject to an  evaluation fee and applicable freight charges     iM Series   i Series     X Series 5    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    Table of Contents    3 1  3 2  3 3  3 4  3 5    4 1  4 2  4 3  4 4  4 5  4 6  4 7  4 8  4 9  4 10  4 11  4 12  4 13  4 14  4 15  4 16  4 17  4 18  4 19  4 20  4 21  4 22  4 23  4 24  4 25    A E EENEG 9  Documentation  SUMMA Y aeea geste EES dE saa is iacnpaadassiaessancagdesnseedsastaaeg 9  Model Series   and Series U N 10  External  Referentes  miii telar ths Ramee ee 11  Introduction  to  Programming  EE 11  Introduction To SGP eege EES EENEG 13  Conventions Used in This Manual  13  The SCPI Commands and Messages  13  USING QUENCES O E E 16  Structure of a SCP  Message EE 16  SGPI Data ForMatsisicoia toi ada 19  System  Considerat ON S a aT ar a idad nacido Ario nadaa india idos 2
68. 7  USA     1 4 Introduction to Programming    This section provides some general information regarding programming instrumentation and  available interface types     1 4 1 IEEE 488 Capabilities of the AC DC Source    All AC DC source functions are programmable over the IEEE 488 or RS232C interface bus   Newer models also offer USB and Ethernet  LAN   The IEEE 488 2 capabilities of the AC DC  source are listed in appendix A of the User s Guide     IEEE 488 Address    The AC DC source operates from a single IEEE 488 address that may be set from the front  panel or programmatically through the IEEE 488 bus  To set the IEEE 488 address from the  front panel  select the Utility entry from the menu screen  Care must be used when setting  the IEEE 488 address programmatically since the next statement sent to the source must  reflect the new address     iM Series   i Series     X Series 11    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    1 4 2 USB Capabilities of the AC source    All AC source functions are programmable over the USB interface  The USB capabilities of  the AC source are listed in Chapter 2 of the User s Manual  Some capabilities support on  the GPIB interface such as ATN  GET and SRQ interrupts do not apply to the USB interface   The USB interface operates internally at a fixed baudrate of 460800 baud but USB 2 0 burst  transfer rates are supported     To set up the USB interface on a Windows XP PC  refer to section 3 4      USB Interface        The USB 
69. AMD24C test option  Requires use of    ClGuiSlIl Windows software                    iM Series   i Series     X Series 127    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    5 7  PSC       This command controls the automatic clearing at power on of the Service Request Enable  and the Standard Event Status Enable registers  see chapter 7 under 7 6 2 for register  details       PSC ON   1 Prevents the register contents from being saved causing them to be  cleared at power on  This prevents a PON event from generating a  SRQ at power on     PSC OFF  0 Saves the contents of the Standard Event Enable and Service  Request Enable registers in nonvolatile memory and recalls them at  power on  This allows a PON event to generate SRQ at power on   Using the PCS command in this mode allows the control program to  detect a power failure condition that caused the source to power down  and back up again     Command Syntax  PSC lt bool gt   Parameters 0 1 OFF ON  Example  PSCO  PSC 1    Query Syntax  PSC   Returned Parameters OI   Related Commands    ESE  SRE       5 8  RCL       This command restores the AC DC source to a state that was previously stored in memory   including the transient list  with a  SAV command to the specified location  All states are  recalled with the following exceptions     CAL STATe is set to OFF  the trigger system is set to the Idle state by an implied ABORt command  this cancels  any uncompleted trigger actions     Command Syntax  RCL  lt NRf gt   
70. AMETEK    PROGRAMMABLE POWER  Revision AB  April 2011    Copyright O 2002 2011  By California Instruments   All rights reserved    P N 7000 982    California Instruments  i Series  iX Series   SCPI Programming Manual    Series     Series Il    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    SCPI Programming Reference Manual  i   iX Series    and  iM   i   iX Series II AC DC Power Sources     Copyright    1997   2011 AMETEK  Revision AB    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 2    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    About AMETEK    AMETEK Programmable Power  Inc   a Division of AMETEK  Inc   is a global leader in the design  and manufacture of precision  programmable power supplies for R amp D  test and measurement   process control  power bus simulation and power conditioning applications across diverse industrial  segments  From bench top supplies to rack mounted industrial power subsystems  AMETEK  Programmable Power is the proud manufacturer of Elgar  Sorensen  California Instruments and  Power Ten brand power supplies     AMETEK  Inc  is a leading global manufacturer of electronic instruments and electromechanical  devices with annualized sales of  2 5 billion  The Company has over 11 000 colleagues working at  more than 80 manufacturing facilities and more than 80 sales and service centers in the United  States and around the world     Trademarks    AMETEK is a registered trademark of AMETEK  Inc  California Instruments is a trademark owne
71. C Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    Important Safety Instructions    Before applying power to the system  verify that your product is configured properly for your  particular application     Hazardous voltages may be present when covers are removed  Qualified  personnel must use extreme caution when servicing this equipment   y  Circuit boards  test points  and output voltages also may be floating above  WARNING  below  chassis ground     The equipment used contains ESD sensitive parts  When installing    equipment  follow ESD Safety Procedures  Electrostatic discharges might  WARNING Cause damage to the equipment        Only qualified personnel who deal with attendant hazards in power supplies  are allowed to perform  installation and servicing    Ensure that the AC power line ground is connected properly to the Power Rack input connector or  chassis  Similarly  other power ground lines including those to application and maintenance equipment  must be grounded properly for both personnel and equipment safety     Always ensure that facility AC input power is de energized prior to connecting or disconnecting any  cable    In normal operation  the operator does not have access to hazardous voltages within the chassis   However  depending on the user   s application configuration  HIGH VOLTAGES HAZARDOUS TO  HUMAN SAFETY may be normally generated on the output terminals  The customer user must ensure  that the output power lines are labeled properly as to 
72. California Instruments    c i    0   For j   0 To 1  iChar   AscB  Mid   sData  i   2  j   1  1   A8  If iChar  gt  9 Then iChar   iChar   7  c i    c i    16   j   iChar   Next j   Next i  Else     Retrieve ASC values from four byte input data    Note  Don t use ASCB or ASCW functions as results will differ   based on character sets  even on non DCBS Windows    Retrieve ASC values from four byte input data   For i   0 To 3    c i    Asc  Mid   sData  i   1  1    Next i  End If   Get sign bit  sign     c 0  And  amp H80     amp H80    Get exponent value less sign bit  expo    c 0  And  amp H7F    2   Pick up exponent sign  If  c 1  And  amp H80     amp H80 Then expo   expo Or 1   get data less exponent sign bit  c 1    c 1  And  amp H7F    mantisse   c 1      H10000   c 2     amp H100   c 3   mant_f   mantisse   MANT MAX   Process exponent  If  expo  lt  gt  0  And  expo  lt  gt   amp HFF  Then   expo   expo   127   mant_f   mant_f   1   expo val   2   Abs  expo    If  expo  gt  0  Then mant_f   mant_f   expo_val   If  expo  lt  0  Then mant_f   mant_f   expo val  Else   If  mant_f  lt  gt  0  Then   If expo   0 Then  mant_f   mant_f   EXPO MAX    Else  mant_f   mant_f   EXPO MAX  End If  End If  End If   Append number sign and return value  If sign Then mant_f    mant_f    StringToIEEEFloat   mant_f  Exit Function    FloatConvError    Conversion errors are truncated to zero  StringToIEEEFloat   0  Exit Function    End Function    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 57    AC Sou
73. Command error  Unable to complete Unit may be in a mode  requested operation inconsistent with request     102  Syntax error  Command syntax Misspelled or unsupported  incorrect  command    103  Invalid separator  SCPI separator not See SCPI section of  recognized programming manual     104  Data type error  Data type invaled  Check command for supported   data types     108  Parameter not allowed  One or more additional   Check programming manual for  parameters were correct number of parameters  received      Missing parameter  Too few parameters Check programming manual for  received for requested correct number of parameters  operation     110  Command header error    Command header Check syntax of command   incorrect    111  header separator error  Invalid command Use semi colon to separate  separator used  command headers    112  Program mnemonic too Syntax error Check programming manual for   long  correct command syntax    113  Undefined header  Command not Check programming manual for  recognized error correct command syntax    120  Numeric data error  Data received is not a Check programming manual for  number correct command syntax     121  Invalid character in Number received Check programming manual for  number  contains non numeric correct command syntax  character s     s    123  Exponent too large  Exponent in number Check programming manual for  exceeds limits correct parameter range   128  Numeric data not Number received when   Check programming manual for 
74. DC  controller generation in use  If the year code returned by this query equals 1990  the  controller uses the old style command system and you should use the original i series  programming commands listed in this chapter  If the year code is 1995  the unit uses the  new command syntax and the information in this programming manual applies    iM Series   i Series     X Series 164    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    8 5 Sample code       The following sample VB 5 0 code illustrates the use of the System Version command to  handle both controller generations within a single application program  The first two function  are used by the sample code fragment     Function SourceQuery  ByVal cmd As String  As String   This function issues the command cmd and returns the   response in a string  If an error occurs  an empty   string is returned   Dim X As Integer  Dim sl As String   Call Send 0  AC Adr  cmd  NLend    If ibsta s And EERR Then   sl    Else    Process response from AC Source   sl   Space   255    Call Receive 0  AC Adr  sl  STOPend    If ibsta s And EERR Then       T                               gi Sami  ElseIf InStr sl  Chr  10   Then  sl   Left  sl  InStr sl  Chr  10     1   End If  End If       Query3i   sl  End Function       Function bixVersion   As Boolean   This function returns the i series hardware revision   to allow the program to accommodate both i series   controller versions    Returns true is Syst version is 1995  false otherwis
75. E 104  VOLTageGENGelGOUbcel  A 104  VOT AGES Wes esto e le 104  KEE le SL EW MO RE 105  VOL Tage EW TPHlGgered  sasinan aera S aiaa Wiaan RaRa arahina a TAAS tiai kakanda 105  MOL Tage TRIGO A lisas 102  W  waveform   data  eu   lu e 56    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 213    
76. E 488 Device Clear  not available when usign  the RS232C interface  or a  RST command to take effect     Command Syntax  SOURce  PONSetup WGRoup  lt n gt   Parameters 0 1 213  Examples PONSetup WGRoup 2    Query Syntax PONSetup WGR   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   Related Commands TRACe CAT        iM Series   i Series     X Series 97    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 20 Source Subsystem   Pulse    This subsystem controls the generation of output pulses  The PULSe DCYCle   PULSe PERiod  and PULSe WIDTh commands are coupled  which means that the values  programmed by any one of these commands can be affected by the settings of the others   Refer to Table 4 1 and Table 4 2 under PULSe HOLD for an explanation of how these  commands affect each other     Subsystem Syntax     SOURce    PULSe   COUNt  lt n gt    MAXimum Selects transient pulse count   DCYCle  lt n gt  Selects pulse duty cycle   PERiod  lt n gt  Selects pulse period when the count is greater than    1  WIDTh  lt n gt Selects width of the pulses    HOLD WIDTh DCYCle Select which parameter to hold during programming    PULSe COUNt    This command sets the number of pulses that are output when a triggered output transient  occurs  The command accepts parameters in the range 1 through 2E8  If MAXimum is sent   the output pulse repeats indefinitely     Command Syntax  SOURce  PULSe COUNt lt NRf  gt   Parameters 1 to 2E8   MINimum   MAXimum     RST Value 1   Examples PULS COUN 3    PULS COU
77. EC413 FCURve LEVel   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        1EC413 FCURve DWELI    This command will set the dwell time in seconds for the flat curve test  The class must be  selected prior to this command  Query with min and max to find the range of dwell time     Command Syntax IEC413 FCURve DWELI  lt NRf  gt   Parameters   Examples 1EC413 FCURve DWEL 20  Query Syntax 1EC413 FCURve DWEL   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt        1EC413 FCURve PAUSe    This command will set the pause time in seconds  This is the time between tests when  RUN ALL is selected The class must be selected prior to this command  Query with min  and max to find the range of the dwell time     Command Syntax 1EC413 FCURve PAUSe  lt NRf  gt   Parameters  Examples 1EC413 FCURve PAUS 2    Query Syntax 1EC413 FCURve PAUS   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 175    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    1EC413 MCURve LEVel    This command will set the levels for the meister curve test  The class must be set prior to  this command  The IEC413 STATe must be in the off position and the user class must be  selected to accept the command  The command will accept a sequence of five data level  parameters  The first two have a range for O to 20  These two parameters set the test level in    for the frequency range 0 33 to 2 x f1 and 2 to 10 x f1 respectively  The last three  parameters set the test levels for 10 to 20 x fland 20 to 40 x f1 in n f  These values
78. Enable Register  Bit Position          Bit Name   al EXE A E BEE  used        Bwm e    CME Command error DDE Device dependent error  EXE Execution error OPC Operation complete  PON Power on QYE Query error    Command Syntax  ESE  lt NRf gt   Parameters 0   255   Power On Value 0  see  PSC command   Example    ESE 129    Query Syntax    ESE   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt  Register value   Related Commands    ESR   STB        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 125    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    5 3  ESR        This query reads the Standard Event Status Event register  Reading the register clears it   The bit configuration of this register is the same as the Standard Event Status Enable  register  see  ESE   See chapter 7for a detailed explanation of this register     Query Syntax    ESR   Parameters None  Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt  Register value     Related Commands  CLS  ESE  ESE    OPC       5 4  IDN        This query requests the source to identify itself  It returns the data in four fields separated by  commas     Query Syntax  IDN    Returned Parameters  lt AARD gt   Field Information  California Instruments Manufacturer    XXXXXX Model number and letter  nnnnnn Serial number or 0  Rev  xX XX Revision levels of firmware  Example  CALIFORNIA INSTRUMENTS 5001iX AC SOURCE  12345  Rev 3 03        5 5  OPC       This command causes the interface to set the OPC bit  bit 0  of the Standard Event Status  register when the source has completed 
79. Examples  Query Syntax  Returned Parameters       1EC413 MCURve PAUSe    This command will set the pause time in seconds  This is the time between tests when  RUN ALL is selected The class must be selected prior to this command  Query with min  and max to find the range of the dwell time  When the selected GROUP is MCURve  the  pause should normally be set to 0 as no pause is required for this test  If a pause value other  than zero is set  the interharmonic levels during the pause period will be zero     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 176    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    Command Syntax 1EC413 FCURve PAUSe  lt NRf  gt   Parameters  Examples 1EC413 FCURve PAUS 2    Query Syntax 1EC413 FCURve PAUS   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt        1EC413 0SWing LEVel    This command will set the level for the    over swing    harmonics combination test  The  command has two parameters  one for the third and one for the fifth order harmonic  The  IEC413 STATe must be in the off position and the user class must be selected to accept the  command     Command Syntax 1EC413 0SWing LEVel  lt NRf  gt   lt NRf gt   Parameters 0 to 20    Examples 1EC413 0SWing LEVel 10   Query Syntax 1EC413 0SWing LEVel    Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        1EC413 0SWing DWELI    This command will set the dwell time in seconds for the over swing harmonics combination  test  The class must be selected prior to this command  Query with min and max to find the  range of the dwell ti
80. L Calibration is completed  TRANS Transient is completed  MEAS Measurement is completed       iM Series   i Series     X Series 106    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    STATus OPERation EVENt     This query returns the value of the Operation Event register  The Event register is a read   only register which holds  latches  all events  Reading the Operation Event register clears it     Query Syntax STATus OPERation EVENt   Parameters None    Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt  Register Value   Examples STAT OPER EVEN   Related Commands  CLS       STATus OPERation CONDition     This query returns the value of the Operation Condition register  This is a read only register  which holds the real time  unlatched  operational status of the AC DC power source     Query Syntax STATus OPERation CONDition   Parameters None   Examples STAT OPER COND    Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt  Register value        STATus OPERation ENABle    This command and its query set and read the value of the Operation Enable register  This  register is a mask for enabling specific bits from the Operation Event register to set the  operation summary bit  OPER  of the Status Byte register  The operation summary bit is the  logical OR of all enabled Operation Event register bits     Command Syntax STATus OPERation ENABle  lt NRf  gt    Parameters 0 to 32727   Default Value 0   Examples STAT OPER ENAB 32  STAT OPER ENAB 1   Query Syntax STATus OPERation ENABle    Returned Parameters  lt NR1
81. LTage DC LRANge ZERO   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   value range  127 to  128    Related Commands CAL VOLT DC LRAN ZERO       CALibrate  SOURce  VOLTage DC HRANge  FSCale    POSitive   lt NRf  gt     This command will set the calibration coefficent for the positive dc full scale output voltage at  the high voltage range     Command Syntax CALibrate VOLTage DC HRANge  lt NRf  gt   Parameters  lt NRf gt   a value between  127 and  128   Examples CAL VOLT DC HRAN  2    Query Syntax CALibrate VOLTage DCHRANge   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   value range  127 to  128   Related Commands CAL VOLT DC LRAN ZERO       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 46    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    CALibrate  SOURce  VOLTage DC HRANge  FSCale  NEGative  lt NRf  gt     This command will set the calibration coefficent for the negative dc full scale output voltage  at the high voltage range     Command Syntax CALibrate VOLTage DC HRANge  FSCale  NEGative  lt NRf  gt   Parameters  lt NRf gt   a value between  127 and  128   Examples CAL VOLT DC LRAN NEG  2    Query Syntax CALibrate VOLTage DC LRANge NEG   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   value range  127 to  128   Related Commands CAL VOLT DC HRAN ZERO       CALibrate  SOURce  VOLTage DC HRANge ZERO  lt NRf  gt     This command will set the calibration coefficent for the dc output voltage offset at the high  voltage range     Command Syntax CALibrate VOLTage DC HRANge ZERO  lt NRf  gt   Parameters  lt NRf gt   a value
82. Litude   lt n gt  Sets the AC rms voltage amplitude    AC   DC   OFFSet Set the DC offset value in AC DC mode   TRIGgered    AMPLitude   lt n gt  Sets the transient voltage amplitude    MODE  lt mode gt  Sets the voltage mode   FIXISTEP PULSILIST     RANGe    LEVel   lt n gt  Sets the voltage range    PAIR 135 270   150 300 Sets the voltage range pair   SENSe    SOURce  INTernal   EXTernal Sets voltage sense source     SLEW    IMMediate   lt n gt    MAXimum Sets the voltage slew rate    MODE  lt mode gt  Sets voltage slew mode   FIXISTEP PULSILIST    TRIGgered    AMPLitude   lt n gt    MAXimum Sets the transient voltage slew rate  VOLTage  Phase Selectable    This command programs the AC rms  DC or offset output voltage level of the power source   The voltage mode must be set for AC to accept an AC voltage  The Voltage mode must also  be set to AC DC to accept a DC offset value     Command Syntax  SOURce  VOLTage  LEVel    MMediate   AMPLitude   AC   lt NRf  gt    SOURce  VOLTage  LE Vel   IMMediate   AMPLitude  DC   lt NRf  gt    SOURce  VOLTage  LE Vel    MMediate   AMPLitude  OFFSet lt NRf    gt    Parameters 0 to maximum voltage range specified by the LIMit VOLTage  command    Unit V  rms voltage     RST Value 0 volt   Examples VOLT 250 VOLT LEV 25   Query Syntax  SOURce  VOLTage  LE Vel   IMMediate   AMPLitude    Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt    Related Commands  SOUR  MODE VOLT TRIG       iM Series   i Series     X Series 101    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual Califo
83. MEASuse and FETCh subsystems are not affected by the INST COUP  command and always operate on the selected phase only  This means the instrument can  remain in coupled mode while doing measurement queries using    INST  NSEL    lt n gt   FETC  VOLT    WAI     Note that when the instrument is subsequently put in the  uncoupled state using    INST COUP NONE     the last issued phase selection will be in effect   To make sure the desired phase is selected  follow the    INST  COUP NONE    command with  an    INST NSEL  lt n gt     command                   Command Syntax INSTrument NSEL  Parameters 1 2 3  Examples INST NSEL 1    Query Syntax INST NSEL   Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt   Related Commands INST COUP INST SEL       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 51    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    INSTrument SELect    This command may be used select a specific output phase in three phase mode using a  character reference     A    denotes phase A     B    denotes phase B and    C    denotes Phase C   As long as the instrument state is coupled however  programming command will affect all  phases  As soon as the INST COUP NONE command is issued  the last selected phase  becomes selected  To immediately change the output of a single phase only  make sure the  instrument state is uncoupled when issuing the INST SEL command     Note that the MEASuse and FETCh subsystems are not affected by the INST COUP  command and always operate on the selected phase only 
84. N MIN PULS COUN MAX  Query Syntax  SOURce  PULS COUNt   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   Related Commands PULS DCYC PULS PER PULS WIDT       PULSe HOLD    This command specifies whether the pulse width or the duty cycle is to be held constant  when the pulse period changes  The following tables describe how the duty cycle  period   and width are affected when one parameter is set in a single program message  if two or  three parameters are set in a single message  there sequence will define how they will be  affected     Command Syntax  SOURce  PULSe HOLD lt parameter gt   Parameters WIDTh DCYCle    RST Value WIDTh   Examples PULS HOLD DCYC    Query Syntax  SOURce  PULSe HOLD   Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt   Related Commands PULS COUN PULS DCYC PULS PER PULS WIDT       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 98    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments       Parameter Set  DCYCle   PERiod   WIDTh    y Sets WIDTh  If WIDTh  lt  PERiod  recalculates DCYCle   otherwise  recalculates the PERiod and DCYCle        y Sets PERiod  If WIDTh  lt  PERiod  recalculates DCYCle  otherwise  recalculates the PERiod and DCYCle    CE O   Sat Sets DCYCle and recalculates PERiod    Table 4 1   PULSe HOLD   WIDTh parameters    PA  ses Dr andresatates he PERO   es Pros andresaiuites he WIDTH    Tes bye andresstaates PERod      Table 4 2   PULSe HOLD   DCYCle parameters       PULSe DCYCle    This command sets the duty cycle of the triggered output pulse  The duty cycle units are  speci
85. OLTage  HARMonic AMPLitude   lt harmonic number gt   MEASure  VOLTage  HARMonic  PHASe   lt harmonic number gt     Harmonic numbers are related to the programmed frequency of output voltage  Queries sent  with an argument of 0 return the dc component  An argument of 1 indicates the fundamental  frequency  2 indicates the second harmonic  3 indicates the third  and so on              The maximum harmonic component that can be read is limited by the fundamental  measurement bandwidth  which is 19 53 kHz for a single phase configuration and 6 51kHz  for three phase configuration  An error is generated if a query is sent for a harmonic that has  a frequency greater than the bandwidth above  To return all the harmonic components with a  single query  use the following commands     MEASure  ARRay   CURRent   HARMonic AMPLitude    lt n gt    MEASure ARRay   CURRent   HARMonic  PHASe    lt n gt    MEASure ARRay  VOLTage   HARMonic AMPLitude    lt n gt    MEASure ARRay  VOLTage  HARMonic PHASe    lt n gt      These queries always return 51 data values  from the dc component up to the the numeric  option field  lt n gt  if present or the 50th harmonics  Any harmonics that represent frequencies  greater than the measurements bandwidth are returned as the value 0  To return the  percentage of total harmonic distortion in the output voltage or current  use the following  commands              MEASure   CURRent   HARMonic  THD   MEASure   VOLTage  HARMonic  THD        6 6 5 Simultaneous Ou
86. OUPle ALL   NONE Couples or uncouples commands   NSELect 1   2 3 Selects phase A  B or C using numeric references     SELect A B C Selects phase A  B or C using character references    INSTrument COUPle    This command may be used to couple all output phase in three phase mode  When the  phases are coupled  commands issues subsequently affect all three phases  This allows the  output voltage to be programmed for all three phases using a single command and without  the need to select each phase individually  When uncoupled  commands issued must be  preceeded by the PHAS NSEL command and will only affect the selected command     Available parameters are ALL to couple all phases and NONE to uncouple all phases  In  single phase mode  the INST COUP commands are ignored     Command Syntax INSTrument COUPle  Parameters ALL   NONE  Examples INST COUP ALL    Query Syntax INST COUP   Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt   Related Commands INST NSEL INST SEL       INSTrument NSELect    This command may be used select a specific output phase in three phase mode using a  numeric reference  A 1 denotes phase A  a 2 denotes phase B and a 3 denotes Phase C  As  long as the instrument state is coupled however  programming command will affect all  phases  As soon as the INST COUP NONE command is issued  the last selected phase  becomes selected  To immediately change the output of a single phase only  make sure the  instrument state is uncoupled when issuing the INST NSEL command     Note that the 
87. Parameters  lt CRD gt        SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BITS    This command will set the SERial communication number of data bits     Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BITS  lt NRF gt   Parameters 718   Example SYST COMM SER BITS 8   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt        SYSTem COMMunicate SERial SBITs    This command will set the SERial communication number of stop bits     Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERial SBITs  lt NRF gt   Parameters 1 2    Example SYST COMM SER SBITs 1  Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 116    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 24 Trace Subsystem Commands  iX series only     This subsystem programs the output waveform of the AC DC power source     Subsystem Syntax    TRACe   CATalog  Return list of defined  waveforms    DATA   lt waveform_name gt    lt n gt     lt n gt  Assign values to a  waveform   DEFine  lt waveform_name gt     lt waveform_name gt  1024  Create and name new  waveform   DELete     NAME   lt waveform_name gt  Delete waveform to free its  memory     ALL Delete all user waveforms  from memory  TRACe    These commands set the values of a user defined waveform table  The first parameter is  the name of a waveform that was previously defined with TRACe DEFine  Following the  name are 1024 data points that define the relative amplitudes of exactly one cycle of the  waveform  The first data point defines the relative amplitude that will be output at 0 degrees  phase
88. Parameters 0 through 7    Example  RCL 3  Related Commands  RST  GAN       WARNING  Recalling a previously stored state may place hazardous voltages at  the AC source output     iM Series   i Series     X Series 128    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments       5 9  RST       The reset   RST  command has the same effect as an IEEE 488 Device Clear bus  command but can be used over the RS232C interface as well  This command resets the AC  source to the following factory defined states     Table 5 1    RST default parameter values    INIT CONT OFF  SOUR  LIST STEP AUTO  OUT OFF  SOUR  PHAS MODE FIX    OUTP TTLT OFF    OUTP TTLT SOUR BOT    SOUR  CURR PROT DEL  SOUR  VOLT TRIG   SOUR  FREQ MODE FIX  SOUR  VOLT SLEW MODE _   FIX   SOUR  FREQ SLEW MAX  SOUR  VOLT SLEW TRIG   MAX     SOUR  FREQ SLEW MODE   FIX TRIG CONN NONE   SOUR  FREQ SLEW TRIG MAX    SOUR  FREQ TRIG TRIG SYNC SOUR   SOUR  FUNC MODE FIX TRIG SYNC PHAS      TRIG SOUR IMM    Command Syntax  RST  Parameters None  Related Commands  SAV       A  RST command or a IEEE 488 Device Clear also clears all status registers but does not  change the Event Enable registers for each status register group     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 129    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    5 10  SAV       This command stores the present state of the AC DC power source to a specified location in  memory  Up to 8 states  including the transient list  can be stored in nonvolatile memory     Com
89. RM PHAS 180 270     Query Syntax 1EC413 HARM PHAS   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        lt NR2 gt        IEC413 HARMonics DWELI    This command will set the dwell time in seconds for each harmonic  The class must be  selected prior to this command  Query with min and max to find the range of the dwell time     Command Syntax IEC413 HARM DWELI  lt NRf  gt   Parameters  lt seconds gt    Examples IEC413 HARM DWEL 10  Query Syntax 1EC413 HARM DWEL   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt        1EC413 HARMonics PAUSe    This command will set the pause time in seconds  This is the time between each harmonic   The class must be selected prior to this command  Query with min and max to find the  range of the dwell time     Command Syntax 1EC413 HARM PAUSe  lt NRf  gt   Parameters  lt seconds gt   Examples 1EC413 HARM PAUS 2    Query Syntax 1EC413 HARM PAUS   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 180    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    IEC413 IHARMonics LEVel    This command will set the level for the interharmonics test  The command will accept either  one parameter or five parameters  In case of one parameter  the level will be set for the  selected range only  The IEC413 STATe must be in the off position and the user class must  be selected to accept the command     Command Syntax IEC413 IHARmonics LEVel  lt NRf gt    lt NRf1   NRf4  gt   Parameters 0 to 20   Examples IEC413 IHAR LEV 10    Query Syntax IEC413 IHAR LEV   Returne
90. RO    TEMPerature     AC     FSCale      DC      FSCale      ZERO    iM Series   i Series   iX Series    Allows entry of calibration password required to  change calibration coefficients   Ambient temperature calibrations   Calibrate full scale AC current measurements  Calibrate full scale DC current measurements  Cancel DC current measurements offset    Elevated temperature calibrations    Calibrate full scale AC current measurements at  higher temperature    Calibrate full scale AC current measurements at  higher temperature   Cancel AC current measurements offset at a higher  temperature   Ambient temperature calibrations   Calibrate full scale AC voltage measurements  Calibrate full scale AC voltage measurements  Cancel AC voltage measurements offset   Elevated temperature calibrations    Calibrate full scale AC voltage measurements at  higher temperature    Calibrate full scale AC voltage measurements  Cancel AC voltage measurements offset    36    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    Subsystem Syntax  continued       SOURce    PHASe     VOLTage    AC    LRANge    FSCale     ZERO   HFRequency       HRANge    FSCale     ZERO   HFRequency    DC   LRANge    FSCale     POSitive      NEGative     ZERO   HRANge    FSCale     POSitive    NEGative     ZERO   HFRequency    IMPedance    REAL    FSCale   ZERO     REACtive    FSCale       ZERO       IHARmonic     iM Series   i Series   iX Series    Calibrate output phase angle relative to external  sync     Ca
91. RRent HARMonic PHASe  lt NRf gt   FETCh ARRay CURRent HARMonic PHASe  lt NRf gt    Parameters None   Examples MEAS ARR CURR HARM PHAS  16    FETC ARR CURR HARM PHAS   Returned Parameters 17 NR2 values  Related Commands INST NSEL       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 55    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 5 2 Waveform Array Data Format Mode    MEASure ARRay MODe    This command selects the waveform array data format to be used   Available in firmware  revision 2 32 or higher only   The default mode is binary  BIN  which uses an IEEE floating  point data format in which each data sample is transferred as a 4 byte floating point binary  data word  Alternatively  an ASCII format may be selected  ASCii  in which each data  sample is sent as 8 ASCII Hex values representing the 4 byte IEEE floating point data  Note  that the transfer mode only applies to MEAS ARR VOLT and MEAS ARR CURR queries  All  other measurement queries always return ASCII data  Note that at power on  the default  mode is always set to binary  BIN      Syntax MEASure ARRay MODe  Parameters BIN   AGCH    Examples MEAS ARR MOD ASC  Related Commands MEAS ARR VOLT MEAS ARR CURR       Note  The MEAS ARR MOD command is provided to allow waveform data transfers in  ASCII on DBCS versions of MS Windows  Examples of DBCS versions are Chinese   Korean  Japanese etc  On most Windows versions  the binary mode can be used as it  reduces the amount of data transferred and thus provides better th
92. Rent  AMBient    AC   FSCale  NDT  39  CALibrate MEASure CURRent  AMBient  DC  FSCale  NI  39  CALibrate MEASure VOLTage TEMPerature DC ZERO NDT 42  CALibrate MEASure VOLTage TEMPerature DC  FSCale  ND 42  CALibrate MEASure VOLTage TEMPerature  AC   FSCale   lt NRf gt             cccceeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeaes 41  CALibrate MEASure VOLTage  AMBient  DC ZERO ND 41    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 206    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    CALibrate MEASure VOLTage  AMBient  DC  FSCale  NI  41  CALibrate MEASure VOLTage  AMBient   AC   FSCale   lt NRf gt  ooonnnccncccnnnicnnoccnoncccconccnannnnnnannnancnnnns 41  CALibrate PASS Word ictericia road alas idee tee 38  CAL braiel GOU Pcel HAftmonc eens eeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaaeeeceeecaeeesaaesseaeeseeeeesaaeeesaeeseneeee 45  CALibrate  SOURce  REACtive ZERO Na  48  CALibrate  SOURce  REACtive  FSCale  Na  48  CALibrate  SOURce  REAL ZERO  lt Nrf  gt  coococccccocicononcnonccccnncnnnnnnnnnn nn nan cc can nnnn anna cc narran ra nann rancia 48  CALibrate  SOURce  REAL  FSCale   lt Nrf  gt  coocconnncinoccnnnccccncccononanonanncnnccconrnn anna nn nn carr rn nann nn 48  CALibrate  SOURce  VOLTage DC HRANge ZERO  lt NRf  gt  coococococcccconccconnnnononanann cnn ncn nan nnnannnnnnnncnns 47  CALibrate   SOURce  VOLTage DC HRANge  FSCale    POSitive   lt NRf  gt  nsss 46  CALibrate   SOURce  VOLTage DC HRANge  FSCale  NEGative NP  47  CALibrate   SOURce  VOLTage DC LRANge ZERO NI  46  CALibrate  SOURce  VOLT
93. S       Offset     54 msec       4096 DATA POINTS             Offset   0 msec          4096 DATA POINTS          Offset    1000 ms a 4096 DATA POINTS                         Acquisition Time     gt   Trigger  Moment             Figure 6 4  Pre event and Post event Triggering    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 153    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    6 8 Trigger System Summary       Figure shows a functional block diagram of the AC DC source   s trigger system  If both trigger  systems are initiated at the same time  the Acquisition trigger system will respond to the first  trigger generated while the transient trigger system will respond to the second trigger  Thus   the acquisition has the highest priority                    Note  On i series AC DC sources  the acquisition trigger system is not  present    OUTP TTLT SOUR OUTP TTLT STAT RIGGER  BOT OFF OUT  EOT ON     LIST TRIG ACQ SOUR   BUS MEASUREMENT E vee n  TILT  POVIS TRIGGER trobe  PHASE   TRIG TRAN SOUR  IMM TRANSIENT Sale A8    BUS TRIGGER    SYSTEM                      Figure 6 5  Trigger system block diagram    iM Series   i Series   iX Series    154    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    7  Status Registers    You can use status register programming to determine the operating condition of the AC  source at any time  For example  you may program the AC source to generate an interrupt   assert SRQ  when an event such as a current limit occurs  When the interrupt oc
94. SIl Windows Software  No SCPI  commands available      e Airbus AMD24 Option  AMD  Requires ClGuiSll Windows Software  No SCPI  commands available      e Boeing B787 0147 Option  B787  Requires ClGuiSIl Windows Software  No SCPI  commands available      e OMNI OPTION    The AC DC power source will report all installed options  including any firmware options   when queried using the SYST CONF BYTE  or  OPT  command  Additional firmware  options may be added over time  Consult the factory for additional information on firmware  options not listed here but present on your unit     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 167    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    9 2 IEC 1000 4 11   411 Option        The following are the remote commands set for IEC1000 4 11  The ABORt command will  terminate a test in progress at any time  Test completion can be checked using the  OPC   query if the  OPC 1 command is issued immediately after an IEC1000 4 11 command  Upon  completion of the test run  OPC  will return a 1  This may be relevant for ATE applications  in view of long test times for some IEC 1000 4 11 test sequences     Details on the actual tests performed as a result of each of these commands may be found  in the IEC 1000 4 11 option section of the User Manual which is supplied with the AC DC  power source     1EC411     NOMinal    VOLTage     DIPS     RUN    ALL    SINGle   VOLTage    PERCent    CYCLes   ANGLe   STATe    VARiants   RUN    ALL    SINGle    HOLD     
95. Series   i Series   iX Series 10    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    1 3 External References       SCPI References  The following documents will assist you with programming in SCPI   e Beginner s Guide to SCPI     Highly recommended for anyone who has not had previous experience programming with  SCPI     IEEE 488 References    The most important IEEE 488 documents are your controller programming manuals  IEEE   488 Command Library for Windows    etc  Refer to these for all non SCPI commands  for  example  Local Device Clear and Group Execute Trigger bus commands      e IEEE 488 command library for Windows     e lEEE 488 controller programming  The following are two formal documents concerning the IEEE 488 interface     e ANSI IEEE Std  488 1 1987 IEEE Standard Digital Interface for Programmable  Instrumentation  Defines the technical details of the IEEE 488 interface  While much of  the information is beyond the need of most programmers  it can serve to clarify terms  used in this guide and in related documents     e ANSI IEEE Std  488 2 1987 IEEE Standard Codes  Formats  Protocols  and Common  Commands  Recommended as a reference only if you intend to do fairly sophisticated  programming  Helpful for finding precise definitions of certain types of SCPI message  formats  data types  or common commands     The above two documents are available from the IEEE  Institute of Electrical and Electronics  Engineers   345 East 47th Street  New York  NY 1001
96. Subsystem syntax     SOURce    PONSetup    FREQuency  lt n gt  Set the frequency value   VOLTage    LEVel   lt n gt  Set the voltage level  MODE DC AC ACDC Set the voltage mode   CURRent  lt n gt  Set the current limit   PHASe    ANGLe  Set the phase angle relative to external    VRANge 135 270 150 300 Set the voltage range  NOUTput ONEPhase THReephase LAST  Set the command language    OUTPut     RELay  0 1 OFF ION Set the state of the output relay  OLOad     MODE  CVOL CCUR Set the over load mode const voltage or const   current   CLOCk INT EXT Set the the clock source to internal or external  SENSe INT EXT Set the voltage sense to internal or external  WGRoup  lt n gt  Set the wave group to 0   3  iX series only     PONSetup FREQuency    This command sets the initial frequency of the power source at the power on     Command Syntax  SOURce  PONSetup FREQuncy  lt NRf  gt   Parameters set by the LIMit FREQuency  Examples PONS FREQ 50    Query Syntax PONS FREQ   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        PONSetup VOLTage  LEVel     This command sets the output voltage level at the power on  This voltage level cannot  exceed the limit at the initial voltage range  On models with dual voltage range pairs   e g 135 270 V and 150 300 V settings   the maximum initial values that can be set are a  function of the selected voltage range pair configured  See VOLT RANG PAIR command in  section 4 21     Command Syntax  SOURce  PONSetup VOL Tage  LEVel   lt NRf  gt   Parameters set by the LIMi
97. T e BI KEE 170  IEC 411    NOMinal  VOET ages ccoo hal nel nadia Nd teva 168  IEC4173s IHARMOoni    Ss RU EE 181    EC413 1HARmonics  STEET 181  IEC EENG 173  IEC4 EEN He BIER DWEL EE 175  IEG 4 EH e BT EE 175  ICC ve  Allee See ii E ZEN e dit 175  177  IEC4 13  GROUP ir aa pth ea ead peters ead aed 175  IEG 413  HARM IDWEEL Mh parea anaren diria tae verve  dbp teenth   t dee 180  IEC 413  HARM  PAU Se coccion Deve teed poten ech deeds deet 180  IEC41 3 HARMOnics LE Vel            cccccccccssssececsssccesseaeeecseeueeecsecaeeesseeaeeessecaeeesseeaeeesseaueeeseesaesesseanensees 179  IECG413 HARMomes PHASE eiae eea as aE NE E ea er ACEEA EEE UTEE REEE n 180  IECG3  lH  Abmoncsl EVel nn nnnnnn nn nn naar nn rn naar nn rr naar nn rn naar nr rn naar nnnnianns 181  IEC413 INDVidual HARMonics  NUMBer      ssseeseesseesseeeseessrussrnssnnesrnssrnssrnssrnssrnssrnssrnssrnssrnssrnssrnssrnnt 174  IEC413 INDVidual IHARMonics  FREQuency              ceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeseaeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeesaeeeeneeeed 174  IECA 32INDVidual GwWEeolPRANGel eens eeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeesaaeseeaeeseeeesaeestaeeeeeeeeed 174  ECAS MOUR ve DWEL enee ae E E A E EER E TE R E A E E N 176  IEGATS MOUR RTE 176     EC413 OSWing DWELI   cositas a aaa ae a E a A A a A E EA RAER teak 177  IEC ATS  OSWiING LEV eC EE 177  IEC ATS ene RE 177  IE CATS PAU Orina Deeg eege eebe teat 173  EGA NS RUN EE 173  IECH STA Ocarina nO anos Shades teas 173  IECA1S S TERE SIZE  roo corro aries 174  IEC413 SWEep CURRent RESona
98. TEE 73  OQUTPUETTE TESTA Tel ee ie Meee iain ieee eel ae 72  QUTPUESTA Tela eg es i ee iat de A A eee i 70  P  REI Ee Zeeche abad ee EE dee gegen 93  PONSettip  CURRIN  Is EE 95  PONSetup FREQUENCy  tii dia 94  PONSetup OLOad MODE   siii ia 96  PONSetup OUTPUt REL  iii 96  PDOhNZetup PHAGetANGLel aen 95  PONSetup VOLTage MODE A 95  PONSetup VOLTage  LEVel   ooooooncoconncnnnnnccnnccconoconnnccnnnnnccnarnnn rca cnc rn 94  NOTTE EE 95  Port number   RE 34  programita 20  PUESSCOUNE a dee 98  PUESEDE US da NOA 99  PUESSHO DEE 98  AO ESTE H PIE RIO a e 99  PUESSIWID RR Meet EE ee uct Na O Ne cer cea 100  Q  QUEME ii A A AA 16  R  RJ45   CONNECT AS os a Ae lea NR a ES A aaa EL ay 32  A iva Se SMa ie Nuh alive E E suds E T E vege Saudia weet adth 18  ROOt i Gina ee I   ai ie Ma Gen Ai a ee a ae 14    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 211    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    S  LEE 13  MOSS we nies aie A ede niet deel 14  PFOGrAIM MESSAGE iii aa aaa aaaea a aaa iaaa ara aaa 14  response message  sss ii i ds anae ra a ad 14  SENSE  SWE6pOFFS  t POINIS wes  ins eai eaa ta diia dis 84  SENSE  SWEep  TIN Temal nierien a a aa tel a aa ened Dana aaien a Taa 84  SeParalon A ay Sette a ate athe a a a aa aaa ea eee tnt e E 18  SOMOS  ii A A A dda A A ada a va A 10  SOMOS Ui  AS od rl tal india riada inet des 10  GTATusObEbRaton CON Don  107  STA T  s OPERA ON E NA BA a r r a a a a a e E ae Sar iare ia aier eidi 107  STATUS OPERationEV ENC  a ici ici iii iaa ae iii de
99. TIME   VOLTage    PERCent      FALL     TIME      RISE     TIME     1EC411  NOMinal  VOLTage    This command set the nominal voltage for the test    Command Syntax 1EC411  NOMinal  VOLTage  lt NRf gt   Parameters  lt volatge gt   Examples 1EC411 VOLT 230    Query Syntax 1EC411 VOLT   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 168    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    1EC411 DIPS RUN  ALL     This command will cause the automated test sequence by the standard to run  Refer to  Table 13 in the User Manual     Command Syntax IEC411 DIPS RUN  ALL   Parameters  lt none gt   Examples 1EC411 DIPS RUN    Query Syntax none  Returned Parameters  lt none gt        1EC411 DIPS RUN SINGle    This command will run a single test once  The test is defined by the dip parameters voltage   cycle and angle     Command Syntax 1EC411 DIPS RUN SINGle  Parameters  lt none gt    Examples 1EC411 DIPS RUN SING  Query Syntax none   Returned Parameters  lt none gt        IEC411 DIPS  VOLTage  PERCent     This command defines the dip voltage as a percentage of the nominal voltage when the run  single command is used     Command Syntax IEC411 DIPS VOLTage  PERCent   Parameters  lt numeric gt    Examples IEC411 DIPS VOLT 20   Query Syntax IEC411 DIPS VOLT    Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        1EC411 DIPS CYCLes    This command defines the duration of the dip voltage expressed in the number of cycles     Command Syntax 1EC411 DIPS CYCLes  Parameters  lt
100. The  returned value is of the form YYYY V  where YYYY represents the year and V is the revision    number for that year     Note     This command can be used to determine the revision of an i series    AC DC power source  If the year code equals 1990  the controller uses  the old style command system and you should refer to the original I  series programming manual for the correct command syntax  If the  year code is 1995  the unit uses the new command syntax and the  information in this programming manual applies  Refer to Chapter 8 for  details on command compatability between older and newer i series  AC DC sources     Query Syntax  Parameters    Returned Paramters  Example    SYSTem LOCal    SYSTem VERSion   None    lt NR2 gt   SYST VERS        This command can only be used with the RS 232 interface  lt sets the interface in Local  state  which enables the front panel controls     Command Syntax  Parameters  Example   Related Commands    SYSTem REMote    SYSTem LOCal  None  SYST LOC  SYST REM       This command can only be used with the RS 232 interface  It sets the interface in the  Remote state  which disables all front panel controls     Command Syntax  Parameters  Example   Related Commands    SYSTem REMote  None  SYST REM  SYST LOC       SYSTem CONFigure  BYTE     This command will set the system configuration  This is a protected command and requires a  password  The query response is available however  Available options are returned  separated by a comma  A zero va
101. Tus QUEStionable EVENt                 iM Series   i Series     X Series 160    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    7 7 SCPI Command Completion    SCPI commands sent to the AC source are processed either sequentially or in parallel   Sequential commands finish execution before a subsequent command begins  Parallel  commands allow other commands to begin executing while the parallel command is still  executing  Commands that affect list and trigger actions measurements and calibration are  among the parallel command     The  WAI   OPC  and    OPC  common commands provide different ways of indicating when  all transmitted commands  including any parallel ones  have completed their operations  The  syntax and parameters for these commands are described in chapter 5  Some practical  considerations for using these commands are as follows      WAI This prevents the AC source from processing subsequent commands until  all pending operations are completed except for transients    OPC  This places a 1 in the Output Queue when all pending operations have    completed  Because it requires your program to read the returned value  before executing the next program statement   OPC  can be used to cause  the controller to wait for commands to complete before proceeding with its  program     OPC This sets the OPC status bit when all pending operations have completed   Since your program can read this status bit on an interrupt basis   OPC  allows subsequent commands t
102. URRent    To measure the dc voltage or current  use    MEASure VOLTage DC or   MEASure   CURRent   DC    To measure the maximum current amplitude and the current crest factor  use   MEASure   CURRent   AMPLitude   MAXimum   MEASure CURRent CREStfactor    To reset the peak measuremnt   use                            MEAS   CURR  AMPL  RESet       iM Series   i Series     X Series 147    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    6 6 2 Power Measurements    The MEASure queries can return real  and apparent power measurements as well as dc  power and power factor using the following commands        MEASure  POWer AC APParent  measures the AC component of apparent  power in VA   MEASure  POWer AC REAL  measures the in phase component of  power in watts   MEASure  POWer AC  PFACtor  returns the output power factor   MEASure  POWer DC  measures the dc component of power                      6 6 3 Frequency Measurements    To measure the frequency  use the following command   MEASure  FREQuency           6 6 4 Harmonic Measurements    The MEASure and FETCh queries can return the amplitude and phase of up to the 50th  harmonic of voltage and current  They can also return the total harmonic distortion in the  output voltage or current  For example  to return readings for an individual harmonic  component  use the following commands   MEASure   CURRent   HARMonic AMPLitude   lt harmonic number gt   MEASure   CURRent   HARMonic PHASe   lt harmonic number gt   MEASure  V
103. W  EE  IMMediate   eh Lee MODE  di TRIGgered  ete FUNCtion   heen  SHAPe    ta tds  IMMediate   etude deta tinea nate Loge CSINe  lt n gt   dial MODE   M   LIMit   EEN FREQuency  lt n1 gt   lt n2 gt   Beech ical tate VOLTage  lt n gt    E E CURRent  lt n gt   di   PHASe  lt n gt    EE LIST   aa COUNt  lt n gt  MAX  EE CURRent  lt n gt   lt n gt   raid POINts   bass DWELI  lt n gt   lt n gt   EE POINts     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 196    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    fist jet Sheer tee FREQuency   d EE Ee  LEVel   lt n gt   lt n gt   AE nba POINts   O O  SLEW   lt n gt   lt n gt   EE Ee alba POINTs   rc FUNCtion  E  SHAPe   lt shape gt   lt shape gt   an dadas POINts   Ee eg REPeat  iaa  COUNt   lt n gt   lt n gt   See EE EEN POINts   EE STEP ONCEJAUTO  BEE TTLTrg  lt bool gt   lt bool gt   Tae oars artes POINts   ANA VOLTage  TREO  LEVel   lt n gt   lt n gt   E ee POINts   ee SLEW  lt n gt   lt n gt   ies POINts    Shei ied  IMMediate   lt n gt    EE PONSetup   fects A ORE FREQuency  lt n gt    finite Me Magic    VOLTage  dd  LEVel   lt n gt   EE MODE AC DC ACDC  dia CURRent  lt n gt    diia ta PHASe   AA O  ANGLE   lt n gt    di Seba VRANGE 135 270 150 300  Ae Mee NOUTPUT ONE THRILAST  iia OUTPUT   da rd  RELay  0 1 ON OFF  ae ia aaaeei OLOad   EE  MODE  CVOLT   CCURR  ea AEE KE A CLOCk INT   EXT   Sietieerg debeis SENSe INT   EXT   Pela tan WGRoup  lt n gt    sevestenss PULSe   Drs COUNt  lt n gt   MAXimum  pinpon Zeg DCYCLE  lt n gt   
104. a sinewave  crest factor   1 414   The maximum rms value is defined by the LIMIT  subsystem  H a custom waveform is selected with a crest factor higher than 1 414  the  maximum rms voltage will be less than the LIMIT value     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 134    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    Voltage Ranges    The power source has two voltage ranges that are controlled by relay  The command that  controls the range is     VOLTage RANGe MIN   MAX   135   270  or          VOLTage RANGe MIN   MAX   150   300  iX series only     When the range is set to MIN  135 or 150   the maximum rms voltage that can be  programmed for a sine wave is 135 or 150 volts rms  but it is only on this range that the  maximum output current rating is available     The VOLTage RANGe command is coupled with the CURRent command  This means that  the maximum current limit that can be programmed at a given time depends on the voltage  range setting in which the unit is presently operating     Frequency    The output frequency is controlled with the FREQuency command  To set the output  frequency to 50 Hz  use        FREQuency 50    6 2 4 Voltage and Frequency Slew Rates  Voltage Slew    The AC source has the ability to control the slew rate of AC amplitude and frequency  changes and dc amplitude  This can be used to generate ramps or to protect sensitive loads   To set the voltage slew rate to 20 volts per second  use     VOLTage SLEW 20    At  RST the slew rate is set to M
105. age DC LRANge  FSCale   NEGative NI 46  CALibrate  SOURce  VOLTage DC LRANge  FSCale    POSitive  ND  46  CALibrate  SOURce  VOLTage HFRequency HD 45  CALibrate   SOURce  VOLTage  AC   HRANge HFRequency NI 44  CALibrate   SOURce  VOLTage  AC   HRANge ZERO ZNDIA nan nn nana nnnanccnns 44  CALibrate   SOURce  VOLTage  AC   HRANge  FSCale  ANDA 44  CALibrate  SOURce  VOLTage  AC  LRANge HFRequency ND 44  CALibrate  SOURce  VOLTage  AC  LRANge ZERO  lt NR    gt  cooococococcconcccconcnononcnanoncnancnnan na nannnnnanccnnns 43  CALibrate  SOURce  VOLTage  AC  LRANge  FSCale   lt NR    gt  coonococnccccconicononnnonccccancnnannanannnnancccns 43  command   Ge 35  commands   COMINO e eek SA Sava A A O A 16  CONVENTIONS ssi catia live A al Ov ares yet a oii ee i 13  Eege 2  CURA diria A EA a en ae eae en i ee 75  CURRent PROTection  STAT 6 ci aia 76  D  DISPlay  LOC ation mii EE 50  DISPlay  MODE ET 49  DISPlay STA TO ceci a a a a a ia e 49  DISPlay EXT A a a E AE a 50  DO160  EMERgencyl VOLT_FREQ  M  Aximum cae eeeaaeeeeeeeseeeesaeeesaeeeeeeeeed 187  DO160 ABNormal FREQuency TRANSIeN               cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeesaeeetaeeeeneeeed 189  DOT GO APBhNorm al VO Tage DC LO  189  DO160 ABNormal VOLTage MAXIMUM         ecccceceeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeeseaeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeesaeeeeneeeed 188  DOT G0 APBhNorm al VO Tage MiNmmum 188  DO160 ABNormal VOL Tage  OVER   oooococnccccconocononcnoncononcnconnnnnnnnnnnnn cnn rra rana naar nr cen rn narra 
106. ailable  MEASure and FETCh  MEASure triggers the  acquisition of new measurement data before returning a reading  FETCh returns a reading  computed from previously acquired data     Individual outputs of a three phase source are specified by the setting of  INSTrument NSELect     Subsystem Syntax  MEASure   FETCh      SCALar    VOLTage     AC   Returns ac rms voltage   DCH Returns the dc component of the voltage    HARMonic    AMPLitude    lt n gt  Returns amplitude of the Nth harmonic of voltage   PHASe   lt n gt  Returns phase of the Nth harmonic of voltage   THD  Returns   of total harmonic distortion of voltage    MEASure VOLTage  AC    FETCh VOLTage  AC      Phase Selectable    These queries return the ac rms voltage being sourced at the output terminals     Query Syntax MEASure  SCALar  VOLTage AC   FETCh  SCALar  VOLTage AC   Parameters None    Examples MEAS VOLT AC  FETC VOLT AC   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   Related Commands INST NSEL       MEASure VOLTage DC   FETCh VOLTage DC     Phase Selectable    These queries return the dc component of the output voltage being sourced at the output  terminals  This command should be used when the voltage mode is set for DC or ACDC    Query Syntax MEASure  SCALar  VOLTage  DC    FETCh  SCALar  VOLTage  DC    Parameters None    Examples MEAS VOLT  FETC VOLT   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   Related Commands INST NSEL       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 67    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    MEAS
107. all pending operations   See  ESE for the bit  configuration of the Standard Event Status registers      Pending operations are complete when all commands sent before  OPC have been  executed  This includes overlapped commands  Most commands are sequential and are  completed before the next command is executed  Overlapped commands are executed in  parallel with other commands  Commands such as measurement and calibration are  overlapped with subsequent commands sent to the AC DC power source  The  OPC  command provides notification that all overlapped commands have been completed      OPC does not prevent processing of subsequent commands but Bit 0 will not be set until all  pending operations are completed     The  OPC  query causes the interface to place an ASCII  1  in the Output Queue when all  pending operations are completed  Use  OPC  to poll command completion status     Command Syntax    OPC 1  Parameters 1  Query Syntax  OPC     Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   Related Commands  TRIG  WAI       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 126    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    5 6  OPT        This query requests the AC source to identify any features or options that are installed   Features are identified by a string keyword or a number  A 0 anywhere in this list indicates  that specific feature is not installed  If a feature is installed or available  its corresponding  keyword will be returned  Refer also to the SYSTem CONFigure  BYTE  command  Thi
108. amming the VOLTage RANGe by itself causes the programmed current limit to be set  to the maximum for the given range if it had previously been higher than the maximum  setting for the new range  If the commands   VOLTage RANGe 150   CURRent 37   VOLTage RANGe 300    are send  no error will be generated because the second VOLTage RANGe command  automatically sets the programmed current limit to 18 5  which is the maximum value for the  programmed voltage range        Programming both the current and the voltage range in one program message unit can be  done based on the order and the initial voltage setting  If the following commands are sent   VOLTage RANGe 300  CURRent 44  VOLTage RANGe 150  CURRent 37    no error will be generated because the combined current limit and voltage range specified on  the second line are within the output ratings of the power source  but the voltage range  command must be sent before the current command     Another example of a coupled command is the VOLT RANGE command  Changing voltage  ranges is only allowed if the output relay state is open  The following command sequence  will result in a Error  300     Device specific error        OUTPUT 1  VOLTage RANGe 300  The correct sequency would be     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 138    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    OUTPUT 0  VOLTage RANGe 300  OUTPUT 1    6 4 Programming Output Transients       Output transients are used to     e Synchronize output changes with a p
109. ansfer format   VOLTage    DC   Returns the digitized instantaneous voltage   HARMonic    AMPLitude   Returns amplitudes of the first 50 harmonics   PHASe  Returns phase angles of the first 50 harmonics    iM Series   i Series     X Series 53    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 5 1 Current Array Data    MEASure ARRay CURRent  DC    FETCh ARRay CURRent  DC      Phase Selectable    These queries return an array containing the instantaneous output current in amperes  The  data returned in arbitrary block data format as follows      5 lt block length n gt  lt b0 gt  lt b1 gt  lt b2 gt  lt b3 gt       lt bn 3 gt  lt bn  2 gt  lt bn 1 gt  lt bn gt     where b0 b1 b2 b3 are four hex bytes represent IEEE single precision floating number   where b0 is the most significant byte and b3 is the least significant byte     The output voltage and current are digitized whenever a measure command is given or  whenever an acquire trigger occurs  The time interval between samples is    UX Series    25 6 microseconds for single phase mode and 76 8 microseconds for three   phase mode   UX Series Il  10 4 microseconds for single phase mode and 31 2 microseconds for three   phase mode     The query SENSe SWEep TINTerval  will return the time interval  the position of the trigger  relative to the beginning of the data buffer is determined by SENSe SWEep OFFSet     Query Syntax MEASure ARRay CURRent  DC     lt n gt   lt n gt    FETCh ARRay CURRent  DC     lt n gt   lt n gt
110. anted  data  If the fundamental frequency is programmed to 400 Hz for example  there is no need to  query harmonics above number    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 54    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    Query Syntax MEASure ARRay CURRent HARMonic  AMPLitude     lt nrf gt    FETCh ARRay CURRent HARMonic  AMPLitude    Parameters None    Examples MEAS ARR CURR HARM  FETC ARR CURR HARM  20  Returned Parameters 21 NR2 values  Related Commands INST NSEL       MEASure  ARRay CURRent HARMonic PHASe    lt nrf gt    FETCh ARRay CURRent HARMonic PHASe    lt nrf gt      Phase Selectable    These queries return an array of harmonic phases of output current in degrees  referenced  to the positive zero crossing of the fundamental component  The fundamental component  will return a value relative to the fundamental voltage     The first value returned is the dc component  always returned as 0 degrees phase    the  second value is the fundamental frequency  and so on up to the 50th harmonic  Harmonic  orders can be measured up to the fundamental measurement bandwidth of the  measurement system     UX Series    19 531 kHz in single phase mode and 6 510 kHz in three phase mode   i iX Series Il  48 kHz in single phase mode and 16 kHz in three phase mode     Thus the maximum harmonic that can be measured is dependent on the output frequency   Any harmonics that represent frequencies greater than the above frequencies are returned  as 0     Query Syntax MEASure ARRay CU
111. arameters  lt CRD gt    Related Commands ABOR TRIG TRIG DEL TRIG SYNC  TRIG SYNC PHAS INIT   INIT CONT  TRG WAI       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 121    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    TRIGger ACQuire SOURce    X series only     These commands select the trigger source for a triggered measurement sequence as  follows     IMMediate Acquire the measurements immediate  The FETCh commands return the  requested calculation from the set of acquired data as soon as the  measurement calculations are completed by the controller     SYNChronize Internal phase A angle  BUS IEEE 488 device   TRG  or  lt GET gt   Group Execute Trigger   TTLTrg The signal driving the Trigger Out BNC    Command Syntax TRIGger ACQuire SOURce lt CRD gt   Parameters IMM SYNC BUS  TTLT    RST Value IMM   Examples TRIG ACQ SOUR BUS    Query Syntax TRIGger ACQuire SOURce    Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt    Related Commands ABOR TRIG SOUR   TRIG SYNC SOUR  TRIG SYNC PHAS INIT   INIT CONT  TRG       TRIGger SYNChronize SOURce    This commands select the synchronizing trigger source in generating a step  pulse  or list  output as follows     e   MMediate starts the transient output immediately     e PHASe starts the transient output at the reference phase set by TRIG PHAS     Command Syntax TRIGger SYNChronize SOURce  lt CRD gt   Parameters IMMediate PHASe     RST Value IMM  Examples TRIG SYNC SOUR IMM TRIG SOUR PHAS  Query Syntax TRIGger SYNC SOURce   Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt
112. arent   FETCh POWer  AC  APParent     Phase Selectable  This query returns the apparent power being sourced at the output terminals in kilo volt   amperes  KVA      Query Syntax MEASure  SCALar  POWer  AC  APParent   Parameters None  Examples MEAS POW AC APP     Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   Related Commands None       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 65    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    MEASure POWer AC PFACtor   FETCh POWer  AC  PFACtor     Phase Selectable  This query returns the output power factor  The power factor is computed as     power factor   real power   apparent power    Query Syntax MEASure  SCALar  POWer  AC  PFACtor   Parameters None  Examples MEAS POW PFAC     Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   Related Commands None       MEASure POWer DC   FETCh POWer DC     Phase Selectable    This query returns the DC component of the power being sourced at the output terminals in  kilo watts  KW   The query should be used only when the voltage mode is set for DC  In AC  mode  the same value as the real power reading will be returned if this command is used     Query Syntax MEASure  SCALar  POWer DC   Parameters None  Examples MEAS POW      Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   Related Commands None       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 66    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 9 Voltage Measurement Subsystem    This subsystem programs the voltage measurement capability of the i iX Series  Two  measurement commands are av
113. articular phase of the voltage waveform    e Synchronize output changes with internal or external trigger signals    e Simulate surge  sag  and dropout conditions with precise control of duration and phase   e Create complex  multi level sequences of output changes    e Create output changes that have rapid or precise timing requirements     The following AC DC source functions are subject to transient control     e AC output voltage   e DC output voltage   e Frequency   e Start phase angle   e AC DC voltage slew rate  e Frequency slew rate    The following transient modes can be generated     Step generates a single triggered output change    Pulse generates an output change which returns to its original state after some  time period    List generates a sequence of output changes  each with an associated dwell  time or paced by triggers    Fixed turns off the transient functions  which means that only the IMMediate    values are used as the data source for a particular function     After a  RST or Device Clear command  all functions are set to FlXed  which turns off the  transient functions     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 139    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    6 4 1 Transient System Model    Figure 6 1 shows a model of the transient system  The figure shows the transient modes and  the output waveform that is generated in each mode     When a trigger is received in step or pulse modes  the triggered functions are set from their  IMMediate to 
114. ation i series measurement calibration subsystem    CALibrate   MEASure   CURRent    AMBient     AC     FSCale   DC    FSCale     ZERO   TEMPerature    AC     iM Series   i Series   iX Series    Ambient temperature calibrations  Calibrate full scale AC current measurements  Calibrate full scale DC current measurements    Cancel DC current measurements offset  Elevated temperature calibrations    163    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments      FSCale  Calibrate full scale AC current measurements at  higher temperature  DC    FSCale  Calibrate full scale AC current measurements at  higher temperature  ZERO Cancel AC current measurements offset at a higher  temperature   VOLTage    AMBient  Ambient temperature calibrations    AC     FSCale  Calibrate full scale AC voltage measurements  DC    FSCale  Calibrate full scale AC voltage measurements  ZERO Cancel AC voltage measurements offset   TEMPerature Elevated temperature calibrations    AC     FSCale  Calibrate full scale AC voltage measurements at  higher temperature  DC    FSCale  Calibrate full scale AC voltage measurements  ZERO Cancel AC voltage measurements offset    If you are using control programs that are used in calibrating the i series AC DC power  source  the measurement calibration portions of such programs may have to be revised to  support the new    series controller     8 4 Detecting i Series Controller Versions       A control program can use the SYSTem VERSion command to determine the AC 
115. aximum  which means that AC voltage changes occur at the  fastest possible slew rate  The slew rate applies to programmed changes in AC DC output  amplitude while the unit is operating in fixed mode  Amplitude changes made by the step   pulse  and list transients are controlled by the same rules that apply to all other functions that  are subject to transient control  See  Programming Output Transients         Frequency Slew    The AC source also has the ability to control the slew rate of frequency changes  To set the  frequency slew rate to 30 Hz per second  use        FREQuency SLEW 30    At  RST the slew rate is set to MAXimum  which means that frequency changes occur  instantaneously  The frequency slew rate applies to programmed changes in frequency while  the unit is operating in fixed mode  Frequency changes made by the step  pulse  and list  transients are controlled by the same rules that apply to all other functions that are subject to  transient control  See  Programming Output Transients         iM Series   i Series   iX Series 135    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    6 2 5 Programming the Output Phase    You can control the phase of the AC voltage waveform relative to an external reference with   PHASe  lt n gt     which sets the phase in degrees  If  lt n gt  is positive  the voltage waveform leads the internal  reference or phase A value in three phase configuration     For the 15003i  15003ix clk and 30003ix clk  three phase three co
116. ay on and off  It does not affect the annunciators  In  the off state  the LCD display will be blank but the backlight will remain on  Note that this  state overrides the DISPLay MODE state as well so the display will be blanked regardless of  the display mode setting     Command Syntax DISPlay  WINDow   STAT  lt bool gt   Parameters 0 1 OFF   ON   RST Value ON    Examples DISP STAT 1 DISP STAT OFF  Query Syntax DISPlay  WINDow  STAT   Returned Parameters OI    Related Commands DISP MODE   DISP TEXT       DISPlay MODE    This command sets the display to show either normal instrument functions  or to show a text  message  Text messages are defined with DISPlay TEXT DATA  The MEAS mode when  selected will cause the power source LCD display to revert to the MEASUREMENT 1 display  whenever there is no bus actitivy for at least 3 seconds  This mode can be used to allow  operators to view the measurement 1 screen despite having no control over the front panel     Command Syntax DISPlay  WINDow  MODE lt mode gt   Parameters NORMal   TEXT   MEASurement   RST Value NORMal   Examples DISP MODE TEXT    Query Syntax DISPlay  WINDow  MODE   Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt   Related Commands DISP DISP TEXT       iM Series   i Series     X Series 49    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    DISPlay  TEXT    This command sets the character string that is displayed when the display mode is set to  TEXT  The argument is a quoted string limited to upper case alpha characters
117. be used to query any calibration coefficient but no new  calibration can be performed  Calibration queries always return two values  The first value is  the calibration coefficient itself  the second value is the temperature associated with that  coefficient  All temperate coefficients except for full scale AC voltage are computed by the  AC DC power source controller     The calibration password is defined as the numeric portion of the AC DC power source serial  number spelled backwards  The password needs to be enclosed by single or double  quotation marks  Thus  if the units serial number is HK12345  the calibration password is     54321    and the command syntax would be     CAL PASS    54321       Note that any non numeric characters such as the HK in the example shown here need to be  discarded when sending the calibration password  Only the numeric portion is to be used     Command Syntax CALibrate PASSword lt SRD gt   Parameters  lt numeric portion of serial number reversed gt   default     Examples CAL PASS  34593  CAL PASS  35461   Related Commands  IDN        iM Series   i Series     X Series 38    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 2 2 Measurement   Current    CALibrate MEASure CURReni   AMBient   AC   FSCale   lt NRf gt     This command initiates the calibration of the AC current measurement at full scale and at  ambient temperature     Command Syntax CALibrate MEASure CURRent  AMBient   AC   FSCale   Parameters  lt NRf gt   actual load
118. cence ii eau 66  FETCH VOL Tage  AOT iiine eaten ege 67  FETCh VOLTage HARMonic PHASe     sseeeeeeeeeesresissirssiissrissrissrissrissrisstinttnnstnnntnnstnnnennntnnnennnnt 68  FETCh VOLTage HARMonic  THD  irsinin ariana aaa aa e a aa aiia apai 69  FETCh VOLTage HARMOnic  AA 68  FETCR  VOLTAJE  iii 67  firmware   ele 12  format   Waveformidata EE 56  formats   Le E ere een ee re ene eer One Peer re Coe pe re Cry rs Ree coe E 19  FREQency SEEW TRIGgered visitada el ee eden 78  FREQUEN OY si  Ze ate A tia ies ian tenet ties 77  FREQuency MODE tac cata Eelere Maen tian AEN 77  FREQuency SEEW enee id A tial eae tien thal once a 78  FREQuency SLEW  MODE eer dee tial ii Maen ti aida 78  FREQuency TRIGgGered eet ve Reese ii da 79  FUNCIONA a a daa 80  W  lle el Kee 72  FUNCION Brel 72  S   Tele Ee 81  FUNCION MODE 0 di TE 81  G  EIN Mee EE 20  H  header    Cl de Vu EE 18   SA TA 18  Fieadetz eebe eet ee ETATE AAE ee 14   PUNO aA ek aman 15    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 208    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments     al Accor hae ttre a aie eases fei pee am eet een a een tes 20  I  IEC 41 15 VA Riants RUNEA E lona id eee 170  IEC 41 1  DIPS  ANGLE cui ias deat 170   Ee RE US dE 169  AAN NA A 169   EC411 DIPS RUN AL icon as e 169  IECA 11DIPGSVOL Taoel PER ent  169  ECAT STAT 6 A Mi ee ee a 170  IEC hh VARIants  HOLD  VTT 171  IEC 41 1  VARI ants  FALE TIME  fa cid As 171  IECA11V  Abiante HO D VOL Taoel PERC ent  171  IEG hh VARIants  RISE RTE 171   Se hh TIE
119. comes the root specifier  It  tells the command parser that this is the root or the top node of the command tree  Note the  difference between root specifiers and header separators in the following examples                 CURRent PROTection DELay  1 All colons are header separators    CURRent PROTection DELay  1 Only the first colon is a root  specifier   CURRent PROTection DELay  1  VOLTage 12 5 Only the third colon is a root  specifier    You do not have to precede root level commands with a colon  there is an implied colon in  front of every root level command     2 4 7 Message Terminator    A terminator informs SCPI that it has reached the end of a message  Three permitted  message terminators are     e newline   lt NL gt    which is ASCII decimal 10 or hex OA   e   end or identify   lt END gt    e both of the above   lt NL gt  lt END gt       In the examples of this manual  there is an assumed message terminator at the end of each  message  If the terminator needs to be shown  it is indicated as  lt NL gt  regardless of the  actual terminator character     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 18    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    2 5 SCPI Data Formats       All data programmed to or returned from the AC source is in ASCII  The data type may be  numerical or character string     2 5 1 Numerical Data Formats    Symbol Data Form    Talking Formats   lt NR1 gt  Digits with an implied decimal point assumed at the right of the  least significant digit 
120. command applies to Group 1 only for the the Eurocae standard  Refer to Table 5 in the  User Manual     Command Syntax DO160 NORMal FREQuency TRANsient  Parameters none  Examples DO160 NORM FREQ TRAN    Query Syntax none  Returned Parameters none       DO160 NORMal FREQuency VARiation    This command applies to Group 2 and 3 only for the Eurocae standard  Refer to Table 6 in  the User Manual     Command Syntax DO160 NORMal FREQuency VARiation  Parameters none   Examples DO160 NORM FREQ VAR   Query Syntax none   Returned Parameters none       DO160 EMERgency VOLT_FREQ MINimum    This command will set the voltage and frequency to the minimum level for the emergency  operation     Command Syntax DO160 EMERgency   VOLT_FREQ MINimum  Parameters none   Examples DO160 EMER VOLT_FREQ MIN   Query Syntax none       DO160 EMERgency VOLT_FREQ MAXimum    This command will set the voltage and frequency to the maximum level for the emergency  operation     Command Syntax DO160  EMERgencyl VOLT_FREQ  MAXimum  Parameters none    Examples DO160  EMER  VOLT_FREQ MAX  Query Syntax none       iM Series   i Series     X Series 187    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    DO160  EMERgency VOLTage UNBalance    This command will unbalance the voltage level for each phase to the emergency high and  low operating voltage of each phase  This test is valid only for three phase AC source     Command Syntax DO160 EMERgency VOLTage UNBalance  Parameters none    Examples DO160  EMER VOLT
121. current     Query Syntax MEASure  SCALar  CURRent CREStfactor   FETCh  SCALar  CURRent CREStfactor   Parameters None    Examples MEAS CURR CRES  FETC CURR CRES   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   Related Commands INST NSEL       MEASure CURRent HARMonic   iX series only   FETCh CURRent HARMonic   iX series only   Phase Selectable    These queries return the rms amplitude of the Nth harmonic of output current  The  parameter is the desired harmonic number  Queries sent with a value of 0 return the dc  component  A value of 1 returns the fundamental output frequency  Harmonic frequencies  can be queried up to the fundamental measurement bandwidth of the measurement system     UX Series    25 6 microseconds for single phase mode and 76 8 microseconds for three   phase mode   UX Series Il  10 4 microseconds for single phase mode and 31 2 microseconds for three   phase mode     Thus the maximum harmonic that can be measured is dependent on the output frequency   Any harmonics that represent frequencies greater than above frequencies are returned as 0     Query Syntax MEASure  SCALar  CURRent HARMonic  AMPLitude    lt NRf gt   FETCh  SCALar  CURRent HARMonic  AMPLitude   lt NRf gt    Parameters 0 to 50   Examples MEAS CURR HARM  3    FETC CURR HARM  1  Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   Related Commands INST NSEL       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 62    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    MEASure CURRent HARMonic PHASe   iX series only   FETCh CURRent HARMo
122. curs  your  program can then act on the event in the appropriate fashion     Figure 7 1shows the status register structure of the AC DC source  Table 5 1defines the  status bits  The Standard Event  Status Byte  and Service Request Enable registers as well  as the Output Queue perform standard IEEE 488 functions as defined in the IEEE 488 2  Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation  The Operation Status  and the  Questionable Status registers  implement functions that are specific to the AC DC source     7 1 Power On Conditions       All status register groups are cleared at power on  This means all data bits and all Event  Enable register bits are cleared  It is possible however the set the PON mask in the Event  enable register to cause a SRQ  This can be accomplished using the  PSC command  Once  set  this condition is retained in non volatile memory and will be recalled when power is  applied to the AC DC source  See paragraph 0 for details on the use of the  PSC command     7 2 Operation Status Group       The Operation Status group records signals that occur during normal operation  The group  consists of the following registers     Condition STAT OPER COND  A register that holds real time status of the    circuits being monitored  It is a read only  register     Event STAT OPER EVEN  A register that latches any condition  It is a  read only register that is cleared when read    Enable STAT OPER ENAB  lt n gt  A register that functions as a mask for  
123. d Parameters  lt NR2 gt        IEC413 IHARmonics DWELI    This command will set the dwell time in seconds for each interharmonics frequency  The  class must be selected prior to this command  Query with min and max to find the range of  the dwell time     Command Syntax 1EC413  IHARmonics DWELI  lt NRf  gt   Parameters  lt seconds gt    Examples IEC413 IHAR DWEL 15   Query Syntax 1EC413 IHAR DWEL    Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt        1EC413 IHARmonics PAUSe    This command will set the pause time in seconds between each interharmonics frequency   The class must be selected prior to this command  Query with min and max to find the  range of the pause time     Command Syntax 1EC413  IHARmonics PAUSe  lt NRf  gt   Parameters  lt seconds gt   Examples IEC413 IHAR PAUS 2    Query Syntax IEC413 IHAR PAUS   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 181    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    9 3 2 Interharmonics Subsystem    The following commands are used to enable and generate an interharmonic waveform up to  20  of the programmed voltage value       SOURCce    I HARmonics     STATe  Enable or disable the interharmonics generator     COUPle Couple the interharmonics reference to program  volt       FREQuency Set the interharmonics frequency     REFerence Set the interharmonics reference     VOLTage Set the interharmonics output as   of reference       SOURce  IHARmonics  STATe     This command enables the interharmonics genera
124. d by  AMETEK  Inc  Other trademarks  registered trademarks  and product names are the property of their  respective owners and are used herein for identification purposes only     Notice of Copyright    IM i iX Series Programming Manual    2003 2011 AMETEK Programmable Power  Inc  All rights  reserved     Exclusion for Documentation   UNLESS SPECIFICALLY AGREED TO IN WRITING  AMETEK PROGRAMMABLE POWER  INC      AMETEK         a  MAKES NO WARRANTY AS TO THE ACCURACY  SUFFICIENCY OR SUITABILITY OF ANY  TECHNICAL OR OTHER INFORMATION PROVIDED IN ITS MANUALS OR OTHER  DOCUMENTATION     b  ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR LOSSES  DAMAGES  COSTS OR EXPENSES   WHETHER SPECIAL  DIRECT  INDIRECT  CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL  WHICH MIGHT  ARISE OUT OF THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION  THE USE OF ANY SUCH INFORMATION WILL  BE ENTIRELY AT THE USER S RISK  AND    c  REMINDS YOU THAT IF THIS MANUAL IS IN ANY LANGUAGE OTHER THAN ENGLISH   ALTHOUGH STEPS HAVE BEEN TAKEN TO MAINTAIN THE ACCURACY OF THE TRANSLATION   THE ACCURACY CANNOT BE GUARANTEED  APPROVED AMETEK CONTENT IS CONTAINED  WITH THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION  WHICH IS POSTED AT  WWW PROGRAMMABLEPOWER COM     Date and Revision  October 2013 Revision AB    Part Number  7000 982    Contact Information    Telephone  800 733 5427  toll free in North America   858 450 0085  direct     Fax  858 458 0267   Email  sales ppd ametek com  service ppd ametek com   Web  www programmablepower com    iM Series   i Series     X Series 3    A
125. defined waveforms may be created and stored in one of 4 separate groups     Because waveform shape commands are coupled with the voltage commands  changing  waveforms without changing the programmed voltage may result in an error if the resulting  peak voltage amplitude exceeds the maximum voltage rating of the AC DC power source   Refer to  Coupled Commands  for more information     6 2 8 Individual Phases  iX Series only     In the 15003ix system configuration  the following functions can be controlled separately in  each phase     VOLTage  CURRent  PHASe   FUNCtion  MEASure  FETCh   CALibrate    Selecting a Phase    Two commands determine which output phase or phases receive commands in the three  phase mode  These are     INSTrument COUPle ALL   NONE  INSTrument NSELect  lt n gt     The  RST setting for INSTrument COUPle is NONE  This setting causes programming  commands to be sent to the selected output phases only           To send a programming command to all of the output phases  set INSTrument COUPle to   ALL  For individual phase programming use ALL  then select the desired output to receive   the command with INSTrument NSELect  For example  when the commands  INSTrument COUPle NONE  INSTrument NSELect 2    are sent  all subsequent voltage commands will go to output phase 2  and all measurement  queries will return readings from output phase 2           Note  The INSTrument COUPle command has no effect on queries  In the  three phase mode  queries are always direct
126. del    Figure 6 2 is a model of the trigger system  The rectangular boxes represent states  The  arrows show the transitions between states  These are labeled with the input or event that  causes the transition to occur                                      L ABOR   IDLE STATE m  RST   INIT CONT OFF  INIT  IMM   INITIATED STATE   INIT CONT ON  OR  LIST NOT COMPLETE  amp  TRIGGER RECEIVED    LIST STEP ONCE       WAIT FOR SYNC STATE             SYNC COMPLETED                            OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT  STEP PULSE LIST  CHANGES CHANGES CHANGES                                     YES  putse NO    COUNT  DONE                 LIST  YES COMETE NO    LIST  STEP ONCE         _  2                Figure 6 2   Transient Trigger System Model    iM Series   i Series     X Series 144    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    6 5 2 Initiating the Output Trigger System    When the source is turned on  the trigger subsystem is in the idle state  In this state  the  trigger subsystem ignores all triggers  Sending the following commands at any time returns  the trigger system to the Idle state     ABORt   RST    The INITiate commands move the trigger system from the Idle state to the Initiated state   This enables the AC source to receive triggers  To initiate for a single triggered action  use     INITiate  IMMediate    After a trigger is received and the action completes  the trigger system will return to the Idle  state  Thus it will be necessary to initiate the syste
127. ders  the interface assumes they are there  For example   if you enter  SOURCe  VOLTage 115  the interface recognizes it as   SOURce  VOLTage LEVel 115  This returns the active path to the root   VOLTage   But if  you enter  SOURce  VOLTage LEVel 115 then the active path remains at  LEVel This allows  you to send     SOURce    VOLTage LEVel 115 RANGe 135          in one message  If you did not send LEVel you are allowed to send the following command         SOURce  VOLTage 115 FREQuency 60       The optional header  SOURce  precedes the current  frequency  function  phase  pulse  list   and voltage subsystems  This effectively makes  CURRent  FREQuency   FUNCtion    PHASe   PULse  LIST  and  VOLTage root level commands     Moving Among Subsystems    In order to combine commands from different subsystems  you need to be able to restore the  active path to the root  You do this with the root specifier      For example  you could open  the output relay and check the status of the Operation Condition register as follows     OUTPut STATe ON    STATus OPERation CONDition        Because the root specifier resets the command parser to the root  you can use the root  specifier and do the same thing in one message     OUTPut on   STATus OPERation CONDition        The following message shows how to combine commands from different subsystems as well  as within the same subsystem     VOLTage RANGe 135 LEVel 115  CURRent 10 PROTection STATe ON       Note the use of the optional header LEVe
128. driver is distributed on the CIC496 CD ROM     Step 1  USB Device Driver installation       Found New Hardware Wizard    Welcome to the Found New  Hardware Wizard  Windows will search for current and updated software by    looking on your computer  on the hardware installation CD  or on  the Windows Update Web site  with your permission      Read our privacy policy    Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for  software     O Yes  this time only    O Yes  now and every time   connect a device    o    Click Next to continue     Cancel       iM Series   i Series     X Series 23    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    When the    Found New Hardware Wizard    dialog appears  select the    No  not this  time    option  The drivers are not available on line  Click on Next button to continue     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 24    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments       Found New Hardware Wizard    This wizard helps you install software for     iX AC Source        H your hardware came with an installation CD  12 or floppy disk  insert it now     What do you want the wizard to do     O Install from a list or specific location  Advanced     Click Next to continue        The next dialog will ask you to install the software for the iX AC Source  Select the    Install  the software automatically  Recommended option and click on Next to continue  If you are  prompted for a file path  browse to the CD root drive and then USB_Inf  eg
129. dwell    Time needed to slew to   Check dwell times in transient  final value is less than list settings  Increase dwell time  dwell time  or change slew rate for affected   parameter      Illegal during transient  Operation requested Wait till transient execution is  not available while completed or abort transient  transient is running  execution first      Output relay must be Operation not possible Close relay before attempting   closed  with open relay operation  E g  transient  execution requires output relay  to be closed     18  Trans  duration less then   Dwell time below Increase dwell time to at least 1  1msec  minimum or 1 msec msec    19  Clock and sync must De   Operation not possible Switch to internal sync   internal  with external clock  Default      Input buffer full  Too much data Break up data in smaller  received  blocks      EOS Fault  Hardware error Cycle power on EOS to reset  reported by EOS option   error  If error persist  contact  Contact AMETEK service  department at  service ppd ametek com for  repair      Waveform harmonics Harmonic contents of Reduce harmonic content or  limit  user defined wave reduce fundamental frequency  shape is too high and programmed   could damage amplifier  output stage      ALC or Impedance must   Conflict between ALC Turn off ALC to use  be off  and programmable programmable impedance   impedance mode  Turn off programmable  impedance to use ALC        Table 9 1  Error Messages    iM Series   i Series     X Series 20
130. e    These queries return an array of harmonic phases of output voltage in degrees  referenced  to the positive zero crossing of the fundamental component  The fundamental component  will return a value relative to the fundamental voltage for phase A  Phase A will return a zero  value     The first value returned is the dc component  always returned as 0 degrees phase    the  second value is the fundamental frequency  and so on up to the 50th harmonic  Harmonic  orders can be measured up to the fundamental measurement bandwidth of the  measurement system     UX Series    25 6 microseconds for single phase mode and 76 8 microseconds for three   phase mode   UX Series Il  10 4 microseconds for single phase mode and 31 2 microseconds for three   phase mode     Thus the maximum harmonic that can be measured is dependent on the output frequency   Any harmonics that represent frequencies greater than the above frequencies are returned  as 0     Query Syntax MEASure ARRay VOLTage HARMonic PHASe  lt NRf gt   FETCh ARRay VOLTage HARMonic PHASe  lt NRf gt    Parameters None   Examples MEAS ARR VOLTage HARM PHAS  30    FETC ARR VOLTage HARM PHAS   Returned Parameters 31 NR2 values  Related Commands INST NSEL       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 59    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 6 Current Measurement Subsystem    This subsystem programs the current measurement capability of the AC DC source  Two  measurement commands are available  MEASure and FETCh   
131. e  Dim sResponse As String   sResponse   SourceQuery   SYST VERS      If InStr sResponse   1995 0   Then       bixVersion   True  Else   bixVersion   False  End If          End Function    The next code fragment uses the bixVersion   function call to generate the correct command  syntax     Use group execute trigger for i Series to allow start of all three  controllers at the same time  If bixHardware Then      new generation i series          cmd    ABORT   TRIG  TRAN  SOURCE BUS    Else      previous generation i series   cmd    ABORT   ARM SOURCE BUS    End If       iM Series   i Series     X Series 165    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 166    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    9  Option Commands       9 1 Introduction       The i and ix series both offer a number of options that are implemented in the AC DC power  source controller  If one or more of these options are installed  they may be used from both  the front panel and the interface  For front panel operation of any of these firmware options   consult the User Manual supplied with the unit  For use in an automated test system  this  chapter contains the command sub system syntax for the available test options     Specifically  the following firmware options are available at the time of this manual   s printing   e IEC 1000 4 11   e IEC 1000 4 13   e MIL STD 704E   e RTCA DO 160C    e Airbus ABD0100 1 8 Option  ABD  Requires ClGui
132. e FUNCtion  SHAPe  command selects the output  waveform     Square Waveform   To select the square output waveform  use   FUNCtion SHAPe SQUare   Clipped Waveform   To select a clipped sine waveform use   FUNCtion SHAPe CSINe   To set the clipping level to 10  THD  use   FUNCtion SHAPe CSINe 10    The clipping level is specified in terms of the percent total harmonic distortion in the clipped  sine waveform     User Defined Waveform    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 136    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    To create a user defined waveform  use TRACe DEFine command to create a name for the  waveform  then use the TRACe  DATA  command to send the list of 1024 amplitude points   The waveform can then be selected using the FUNCtion command  For example  a  waveform named  Distortion  can be created with     TRACe DEFine DISTORTION  TRACe DATA DISTORTION  nl  n2  n3       n1024    where n1     n1024 are the data points that define the relative amplitudes of exactly one  cycle of the waveform  The first data point defines the amplitude that will be output at 0  degrees phase reference        Data points can be in any arbitrary units  The AC source scales the data to an internal format  that ensures that the correct ac rms voltage is output when the waveform is selected  When  queried  trace data is returned as normalized values in the range of  1  Waveform data is  stored in nonvolatile memory and is retained when input power is removed  Up to 50 user  
133. e buffer is full   This is the easiest way to make measurements  since it requires no explicit trigger  programming     e Use an acquisition trigger to acquire the voltage and current data from the buffer  Then  use the FETCh commands to return calculations from the data that was retrieved by the  acquisition trigger  This method gives you the flexibility to synchronize the data  acquisition with an external signal  FETCh commands do not trigger the acquisition of  new measurement data  but they can be used to return many different calculations from  the same set of data that was captured as a result of same acquisition trigger     The query response for measurements is not immediate  The source will accept commands  from the interface while the measurement in progress  To prevent the source from accepting  additional commands during measurement the  WAI must be used with the measurement  query command                 MEAS   FREQ    WAI  Making triggered measurements with the acquisition trigger system is discussed under   Triggering Measurements      Note For each MEASure form of the query  there is a corresponding query  that begins with the header FETCh  FETCh queries perform the same  calculation as their MEASure counterparts  but do not cause new data  to be acquired  Data acquired by an explicit trigger or a previously  programmed MEASure command are used     6 6 1 Voltage and Current Measurements    To the rms voltage or current  use    MEASure VOLTage or   MEASure   C
134. e transient trigger system     e Oor OFF turns off continuous triggering  In this state  the trigger system must be initiated  for each triggered event using INITiate TRANsient     Command Syntax INITiate CONTinuous  Parameters 0 1 OFFION   RST Value OFF    Examples INIT CONT ON  Related Commands ABOR INIT CONT  TRG       iM Series   i Series     X Series 120    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    TRIGger  TRANSient  SOURce    This command will determine the source of the trigger event for the transient  The following  sources are available     e   MMediate Triggering occurs as soon as the INIT command is received     e BUS Triggering occurs following the INIT command after receiving the  TRG  command or a Group Execute Trigger  GET  IEEE signal     Command Syntax TRIGger  TRANSient  SOURce  Parameters IMMediate   BUS   RST Value IMMediate    Examples TRIG SOUR BUS  Related Commands ABOR  lt group execute trigger gt        TRIGger COUNt    This command determines whether the phase synchronization is accomplished at the  begining of the transient list or pulse for every COUNt or at the begining of the transient for  the first count only  It accepts the following parameters     e NONe Synchronization is accomplished once    e ALLsynchronization is accomplished for every count     Command Syntax TRIGger COUNt ALL  TRIGger COUNt NONE   Parameters ALL  NONE      RST Value NONE   Examples TRIG COUN ALL    TRIG COUN NONE   Query Syntax TRIG COUN    Returned P
135. eaeeeceesaeeessesaeeesseeaeeesenaeeesenseeseneaaes 62  MEASUre CURRG O aniiass asad 61  MEA S  re FREQUENCY Za  idas ta doses 64  MEASure POWer AC APParent  cccccncocccnnononccnnononncnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn rn rra nr nnnnn nn EEEN SE EEEn REEE Enne E EEEE 65  MIST AO SA saccades a NE ANNEER ENNEA AAA ASAA 66  MEASUre POW Gr AG Zonia O 65  MEASUre POW Gr  DOT ripus ea E E E A nan O 66  MEASure VOL Tage AG rica aiii 67  MEASure VOLTage HARMonic PHASe              ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeceeeeesaaeeesaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeaeeeenees 68  MEAGure VOLL Tage HAbMonie  HD    69    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 210    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    MEASure VOLTage HARMONIC             cccccceeesceceeceeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeeseaaeseeeeeseaesesaaesdeneeseaeeessaeeneaeeseaes 68  MEASUre  VOLTAJE Ocio ii lala candi pci dci pelada de pis 67  MODE a ees tp dette tee 93  N  National Instruments   PEI aer cai Ee Ed ease ate a tee det Ln eas Mae dee eee 20  O  Option   VA liada 191   SE e ot OE 193   ER 193   AM Beer eee e reer ee errr eerie eer 193   Ee Mere cere Poem aae e eg 193  GERT EE DEE ces etek ac ee dde EE cise ct vert ane Alt oe 74  OUT PUGIMP  REAL  eege o e dee E O 73  OU TPutilMbedancelGTATel cn rnnc cnn nn 73  OUTP OMNIE S TA E a a della De deat ok eee 194  OUT PURPRO Tection  C Ear a eege eebe a a panne a a ca 70  OU TPut PO Techion DEL a  76  QUTPUEREMODE  2 5 sscees e dd ol e ee AN oh 71  OUTPUT MOD E 72  OUT PULT TEM e e 
136. ecalled  to overwrite old content      Limit memory lost  Hardware configuration   Contact AMETEK service  settings lost  department at  service ppd ametek com to  obtain instructions on restoring  configuration data      System memory lost  Memory corrupted  Recycle power      Calibration memory lost    Calibration data lost  Contact AMETEK service  department at  service ppd ametek com to  obtain instructions on restoring  calibration data or recalibrate  unit     me          iM Series   i Series     X Series 204    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments        Start angle must be first Start phase angle in Start phase angles can only   sequence  wrong place   programmed at the start of a  transient list  Once a transient  is in progress  phase angle  cannot be changed     10  Illegal for DC  Operation not possible Switch to AC or AC DC mode   in DC mode    11  Duplicate sequence  Transient list sequence   User new or available  number already used  sequence number instead    12     Too many sequence  Number of transient list   Reduce the number of steps in  steps exceeds the transient list   Max   32 for  maximum  Series   or 100 for Series Il      13  Missing list parameter  One or more transient Check programmed lists   list parameters missing   14     Voltage peak error  Peak voltage exceeds This error may occur when  internal bus voltage selecting user defined wave  shapes with higher crest  factors  Reduce programmed  RMS value      Slew time exceed 
137. ectively  The value of TINT must be set in increments of 25 or 75  usec  The controller will round to the nearest available multiple of 25 6 or 76 8 usec     UX Series II  10 4 to 104 usec for single phase and 31 2 to 312 usec for three phase AC DC  source configurations respectively  The value of TINT must be set in increments of 10 4 or  31 2 usec  The controller will round to the nearest available multiple of 10 4 or 31 2 usec     Query Syntax SENSe SWEep TINTerval   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt     Related Commands SENS SWE OFFS MEAS ARR       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 84    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 16 Source Subsystem   List    This subsystem controls the generation of complex sequences of output changes with rapid   precise timing and synchronized with internal or external signals  Each subsystem command  for which lists can be generated has an associated list of values that specify the output at  each list step  LIST COUNt determines how many times the source sequences through a list  before that list is completed  LIST REPeat determines how many times each data point will  repeat  LIST DWELI specifies the time interval that each value  point  of a list is to remain in  effect  LIST STEP detemines if a trigger causes a list to advance only to its next point or to  sequence through all of its points     All active subsystems that have their modes set to LIST must have the same number of  points  up to 32 for Series   and 100
138. ed to the output selected  by INSTrument NSELect     iM Series   i Series     X Series 137    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    Programming the Output Phase    You can control the phase of the ac voltage waveform relative to an internal reference or to  phase A with     PHASe  lt n gt     which sets the phase in degrees  If  lt n gt  is positive  the voltage waveform leads the internal  reference     In a 15003ix configuration  the PHASe command sets the relative phase of each of the  outputs  The INSTrument COUPle setting is ignored by the PHASe command   it always  controls the output selected by INSTrument NSELect     6 3 Coupled Commands       This section describes how to avoid programming errors that may be caused by the error  checking done for coupled commands such as VOLTage LE Vel     Commands that are coupled to the VOLTage command are the output transient commands  that control step  pulse and list generation  When an output transient is initiated  ready to  receive a trigger   the error checking that takes place for maximum rms voltage        CURRent LEVel and VOLTage RANGe  Programming the current limit by itself to a value that is greater than the maximum allowed  on the presently programmed voltage range causes an error  If the commands  VOLTage RANGe 270  CURRent 40  are sent  an error will be generated because the CURRent command is requesting a current  limit that is outside the maximum value allowed on that voltage range     Progr
139. eeeeeneeescaesesneeeneeeeseaesesaesasneeeeeeseseaeseseenenseeeenes 194  Appendix B  SCPI Conformance Information            ccccscccsseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnaeenseeeeeeeeeseeeseseaeensneeeeees 200  Appendix C  Error Messages         s  ccsseeeeeseesseeeesneeenseeeeeeeesaaeseseeeeeseeeseaesasaaesasneeeeeeeeseaeseseaesnsnaeeses 201  Ir      Gene eS EA A E oH a E P eS PP SR ne eae cee 206    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 7    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    Table of Figures    Figure 2 1    Figure 2 2    Figure 3 1        Partial Command Trevi A AA 14  Command Message Structure   oooccccncccinociconoccconcnnnnnnnnnonn nac c cnn cnn nn rana 17  RS232C Interface Cable Wiring Diaoram  nora nano nc cnc n narran 22    Figure 3 2  DB9 to DB25 Adaptor Wiring Diagramm    22  Figure 3 3  Windows XP Device Manager   USB Pont 26  Figure 3 4  Windows XP Device Manager     Virtual Com Port    30  Figure 3 5  Gui Interface Settings for use of USB port  concccocccioccconococoncccconnnononcnnnn cnn cnn rancia naar nnnnnncnns 31  Figure 3 6  Pinging AC Source LAN IP address  34  Figure 6 1   Output transient system    140  Figure 6 2   Transient Trigger System Model  144  Figure 6 3   Measurement Acquisition Trigger Model  150  Figure 6 4  Pre event and Post event Triggering      oooooccccnnnnccinnnocccnnnnonaccnnnonnnnnnnnn nn nr rnno cnn rra narran 153  Figure 6 5  Trigger system block diagram    oooooonncccccnnococcnnnocccnnnnononcnnnnno cnn nono cnn narran nr rnn
140. en the voltage mode of the source is set for DC    Query Syntax MEASure  SCALar  CURRent DC   FETCh  SCALar  CURRent DC   Parameters None    Examples MEAS CURR  FETC CURR   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   Related Commands INST NSEL       MEASure CURRent AMPLitude MAXimum   FETCh CURRent AMPLitude MAXimum     Phase Selectable    These queries return and hold the absolute value of the peak current as sampled over one  measurement acquisition of 4096 data points  The returned value will be updated only when  a larger value is found  To update the value with every measurement a peak current reset  commnad should be used prior to the peak measurements     Query Syntax MEASure  SCALar  CURRent AMPLitude MAXimum    FETCh  SCALar  CURRent AMPLitude MAXimum    Parameters None   Examples MEAS CURR AMPL MAX  FETC CURR AMPL MAX    Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt    Related Commands INST NSEL MEAS CURR AMPL RESet       MEASure CURRent AMPLitude RESet   Phase Selectable   This command will reset the peak current measurement to zero    Query Syntax MEASure  SCALar  CURRent AMPLitude RESset     Parameters None  Examples MEAS CURR AMPL RES    Returned Parameters None  Related Commands MEAS CURR AMPL MAX        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 61    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    MEASure CURRent CREStfactor   FETCh CURRent CREStfactor     Phase Selectable  These queries return the output current crest factor  This is the ratio of peak output current to  rms output 
141. enabling specific bits from the Event register     It is a read write register   Table 7 1   Operation Status Register       The outputs of the Operation Status register group are logically ORed into the OPER ation   summary bit  7  of the Status Byte register     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 155    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments                                   a QUESTIONABLE STATUS  gt   ei ov CONDITI ON EVENT ENABLE  ei       1  ei OCP   u n  3 x  TEMP O  4    n u  E  nu 38 O  RI     9  Q                                                                                                                                           Isum  TIQNABLE INSTRUMENT ISUMMAR Y  4       d OUNI  register set vr SE W   a  oy CONDITION EVENT ENABLE     OCP  u n  SE  es  TEMP     n u  s  x  n u  O  de 5   oaee  n u  Q e  n u   CL rms  n u  13 15  SERVICE    STANDARD EVENT STATUS STATUS REQUEST  EVENT ENABLE  pe   OUTPUT BYTE  A 7 E DAT  e  n u  cc a  O DATA    O  OYE   4 4 kg DAT     DDE  e 8   S  EXE s  16 16 g S  CME 32 32 e Y  n u  6  7  PON 128 128  EE E SERVICE  YE cc an REQUEST a  O GENERATION  x  oO  o     O       LOGICAL                Figure 7 1   Status System Model    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 156    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments         Bit   Signaal   Meamiig es  Operation Status Group  3 Transient is completed  4 Measurement is completed    Questionable and Questionable Instrument Isummary Status Groups    OV Output v
142. erature  AC   FSCale   Parameters  lt NRf gt   actual load current measured with external device   Examples CAL MEAS CURR TEMP 11 5    Query Syntax CALibrate MEASure CURRent  TEMP   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   value range  1000 to  1000   Related Commands CALibrate MEASure CURRent  AMB   AC   FSCale        iM Series   i Series     X Series 39    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    CALibrate MEASure CURRent TEMPerature DC  FSCale   lt NRf gt     This command initiates the calibration of the DC current measurement at elevated  temperature     Command Syntax CALibrate MEASure CURRent TEMPerature DC  FSCale   Parameters  lt NRf gt   0 or desired offset value   Examples CAL MEAS CURR TEMP DC    Query Syntax CALibrate MEASure CURRent TEMPerature DC   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   value range  1000 to   1000  Related Commands CALibrate MEASure CURRent  AMB  DC  FSCale        CALibrate MEASure CURRent TEMPerature DC ZERO  lt NRf gt     This command initiates the offset adjustment of the DC current measurement at elevated  temperature     Command Syntax CALibrate MEASure CURRent TEMPerature DC ZERO  Parameters  lt NRf gt   0 or desired offset value   Examples CAL MEAS CURR TEMP DC ZERO    Query Syntax CALibrate MEASure CURRent TEMPerature DC ZERO   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   value range 0 to  5   Related Commands CALibrate MEASure CURRent  AMB  DC ZERO       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 40    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instru
143. ers  lt NR1 gt    Example LIST FREQ POIN    Related Commands LIST FREQ       LIST FREQuency SLEW    This command sets the sequence of frequency slew list points  The frequency points are  given in the command parameters  which are separated by commas The order in which the  points are entered determines the sequence in which they are output when a list is triggered     Command Syntax  SOURce  LIST FREQuency SLEW  lt NRf  gt   lt NRf  gt    Parameters 0 01 to 1E9  MAXimum   Unit HZ  Hertz  per second   Examples LIST FREQ SLEW 10  1E2  MAX   Query Syntax  SOURce  LIST FREQ SLEW    Returned Parameters  lt NR3 gt    Related Commands LIST FREQ SLEW POIN  LIST COUN  LIST DWEL LIST STEP LIST FREQ       LIST FREQuency SLEW POINts     This query returns the number of points specified in LIST FREQuency SLEW  Note that it  returns only the total number of points  not the point values     Query Syntax  SOURce  LIST FREQ SLEW POINts   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt     Example LIST FREQ SLEW POIN   Related Commands LIST FREQ SLEW       iM Series   i Series     X Series 87    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 16 4 List Waveform Function  iX series only     LIST FUNCtion  SHAPe   Phase Selectable    This command sets the sequence of the waveform shape entries  The order in which the  shapes are given determines the sequence in which the list of shape will be output when a  list transient is triggered  The following shapes may be specified     SINe A sinewave is o
144. fied in percent     Command Syntax  SOURce  PULSe DCYCle lt NRf  gt   Parameters 0 to 100  MINimum MAXimum   RST Value 50   Examples PULS DCYC 75  PULS DCYC MAX  Query Syntax  SOURce  PULSe DCYCle   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   Related Commands PULS COUN PULS PER PULS WIDT       PULSe PERiod    This command sets the period of a triggered output transient The command parameters are  model dependent     Command Syntax  SOURce  PULSe PERiod lt NRf  gt   Parameters 2 msecs to 90 000 secs MINimum MAXimum  Unit S  seconds     RST Value 1 sec    Examples PER 0 001PER MIN   Query Syntax  SOURce  PERiod    Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt    Related Commands PULS COUN PULS DCYC  PULS WIDT       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 99    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    PULSe WIDTh    This command sets the width of a transient output pulse  The command parameters are  model dependent     Command Syntax  SOURce  PULSe WIDTh lt NRf  gt   Parameters 1 msecs to 90 000 secs  MINimum MAXimum  Unit S  seconds     RST Value 0 5 secs    Examples PULS WIDT 0 001PULS WIDT MIN   Query Syntax  SOURce  PULSe WIDTh    Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt    Related Commands PULS COUN PULS DCYC  PULS PER       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 100    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 21 Source Subsystem   Voltage    This subsystem programs the output voltage of the AC DC power source     Subsystem Syntax     SOURce    VOLTage    LEVel     IMMediate     AMP
145. formation   A serial poll also returns the value of the Status Byte register  except that  bit 6 returns Request for Service  RQS  instead of Master Status Summary  MSS   A serial  poll clears RQS  but not MSS  When MSS is set  it indicates that the source has one or more  reasons for requesting service     Bit Configuration of Status Byte Register    Bit Position 7    mwm  a    a ERC   8   7       OPER _ operation status summary MSS master status summary  ESB event status byte summary RQS request for service  QUES questionable status summary MAV message available    Query Syntax  STB     Returned Paramters  lt NR1 gt   Register binary value   Related Commands    SRE  ESE     ESR       5 13  TRG       This command generates a trigger to any subsystem that has BUS selected as its source   for example  TRIG SOUR BUS  The command has the same affect as the Group Execute  Trigger   lt GET gt   command     Command Syntax  TRG  Parameters None    Related Commands ABOR INIT       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 131    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    5 14  WAI       This command instructs the AC DC source not to process any further commands until all  pending measurement and calibration operations are completed  Pending operations are  complete when all commands sent before  WAI have been executed  This includes  overlapped commands  Most commands are sequential and are completed before the next  command is executed  Overlapped commands are executed in pa
146. ftware provided with each AC power source  As such  there are no SCPI    commands that apply to these revisions of MIL STD 704 and they cannot be executed from  the front panel  See the iX Series User Manual  P N 7000 970  or iX Series ll User Manual     P N 4994 970  for more details on performing tests to these revisions of the standard     This capability requires the presence of the    704 option     9 5 1 AC SYSTEM     MIL704    VERSion DIE   SSTate     VOLT    LEVel    MODulation   UNBalance    PHASe    DIFFerence   WAVeform    DISTortion      FREQuency    LEVel    MODulation   TRANsient    VOLTage    LOW      HIGH    FREQuency    LOW      HIGH   ABNormal   VOLTage     UNDer    OVER    FREQuency    UNDer    OVER   EMERgency   VOLTage    FREQuency    iM Series   i Series     X Series    190    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    9 5 2 DC SYSTEM     MIL704  VERSion DIE  SSTate     VOLT    LEVel    RIPPle   TRANsient   VOLTage    LOW      HIGH   ABNormal  MOL Tage     UNDer     OVER   EMERgency    VOLTage    All commands do not accept parameters and have no query format except for  MIL704 VERSion  which accepts a letter D or E as a parameter  Its query format response  will return the letter D or E based on the revision selected     Programming Considerations    Some of the tests take a lengthy time to complete  The  OPC command could be used to  determine the completion of the command     Example   MIL704 SST VOLT  OPC 1    The query  OPC  Will ret
147. ge    LEVel   lt n gt    lt n gt  Sets the voltage list   POINts  Returns the number of voltage level points     SLEW  lt n gt    lt n gt  Sets the voltage slew list   POINts  Returns the number of voltage slew points    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 85    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 16 1 List   Count  LIST COUNt    This command sets the number of times that the list is executed before it is completed  The  command accepts parameters in the range 1 through 2E8     Command Syntax  SOURce  LIST COUNt lt NRf  gt   Parameters 1 to 2E8   MINimum   MAXimum   RST Value 1   Examples LIST COUN 3  LIST COUN MAX    Query Syntax  SOURce  LIST COUNt   Returned Parameters  lt NRf gt   Related Commands LIST FREQ LIST TTLT LIST  VOLT       4 16 2 List   Dwell  LIST DWELI    This command sets the sequence of list dwell times  Each value represents the time in  seconds that the output will remain at the particular list step point before completing the step   At the end of the dwell time  the output of the source depends upon the following conditions     e lf LIST STEP AUTO has been programmed  the output automatically changes to the  next point in the list     e lf LIST STEP ONCE has been programmed  the output remains at the present level until  a trigger sequences the next point in the list     The order in which the points are entered determines the sequence in which they are output  when a list is triggered     Command Syntax  SOURce  LIST DWELI lt NRf 
148. he AC source   e The SCPI interface encounters a message terminator  e The SCPI interface encounters a root specifier  Active Header Path    In order to properly traverse the command tree  you must understand the concept of the  active header path  When the AC DC source is turned on  or under any of the other  conditions listed above   the active path is at the root  That means the SCPI interface is  ready to accept any command at the root level  such as SOURCe or MEASurement    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 14    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    If you enter SOURCe the active header path moves one colon to the right  The interface is  now ready to accept  VOLTage  FREQuency  or  CURRent as the next header  You must  include the colon  because it is required between headers     If you now enter  VOLTage  the active path again moves one colon to the right  The interface  is now ready to accept either  RANGe or  LEVel as the next header     If you now enter  RANGe you have reached the end of the command string  The active  header path remains at  RANGe If you wished  you could have entered  RANGe 135  LEVel  115 and it would be accepted as a compound message consisting of     SOURce  VOLTage RANGe 135   SOURce VOLTage LEVel 115           The entire message would be        SOURce  VOLTage RANGe 135 LEVel 115       The message terminator after LEVel 115 returns the path to the root   The Effect of Optional Headers    If acommand includes optional hea
149. he measurement trigger     The following measurement trigger sources can be selected     IMMediate Aquire the measurements immediate   SYNChronize Internal to phase A angle   BUS IEEE 488 device   TRG  or  lt GET gt   Group Execute Trigger   TTLTrg The signal driving the Trigger Out    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 149    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    6 6 8 Measurement Trigger System Model    Figure 6 3 is a model of the measurement trigger system  The rectangular boxes represent  states  The arrows show the transitions between states  These are labeled with the input or  event that causes the transition to occur           d ABOR   gt  IDLE STATE  lt    _  RST       RCL                INIT  IM M  Aca            gt  INITIATED STATE       TRIGGER H END        DATA ACQUISITION                               Figure 6 3   Measurement Acquisition Trigger Model    6 6 9 Initiating the Measurement Trigger System    When the AC source is turned on  the trigger system is in the idle state  In this state  the    trigger system ignores all triggers  Sending the following commands at any time returns the  trigger system to the Idle state     ABORt  RST  RCL    The INITiate commands move the trigger system from the Idle state to the Initiated state    This enables the AC source to receive triggers  To initiate for a measurement trigger  use   INITiate  IMMediate ACQuire   After a trigger is received and the data acquisition completes  the trigger system will
150. hed  summary of all Status Byte register bits that are enabled by  the Service Request Enable register  MSS is set whenever the AC source has one or more  reasons for requesting service     STB  reads the MSS in bit position 6 of the response but  does not clear any of the bits in the Status Byte register     The RQS Bit    The RQS bit is a latched version of the MSS bit  Whenever the AC source requests service   it sets the SRQ interrupt line true and latches RQS into bit 6 of the Status Byte register    When the controller does a serial poll  RQS is cleared inside the register and returned in bit  position 6 of the response  The remaining bits of the Status Byte register are not disturbed     The MAV bit and Output Queue    The Output Queue is a first in  first out  FIFO  data register that stores AC source to   controller messages until the controller reads them  Whenever the queue holds one or more  bytes  it sets the MAV bit  bit 4  of the Status byte register     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 159    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    7 6 Examples       The following section contains examples of commonly used operations involving the status  registers     7 6 1 Determining the Cause of a Service Interrupt    You can determine the reason for an SRQ by the following actions   Step 1   Determine which summary bits are active Use     STB  or serial poll    Step 2   Read the corresponding Event register for each summary bit to determine which  even
151. idad 107  STATus QUEStionable CONDItION   00 0 0    eee eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 108  STATus QUEStionable ENABle   eeeeseseseseseseseseseserersrsrersrersrerersrsrerurersrsrurrersrererererererererererererernnt 108  STATus QUEStionable INSTrument ISUMmary CONDItiION  0 00    eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeee eter cnn nn nana nnnancncnns 109  STATus QUEStionable INSTrument ISUMmary ENABIe       ssseeseeseeeseeesinesrnssrrssrrssinssrnssrnssrnssressren 109  STATus QUEStionable INSTrument ISUMMary  dooonccccccccnnncconocnnononccnnccnnnnc nan nnnano cnn cnn arrancan 109  STATus QUEStionable   EVENT   oo    cecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeeeeseeeeesaesesaeeeeneeee 108  SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRESS   saeesesesesesesssesersrersrerersrerererersrsrersrersrererersrerererererererererent 112  GvVGTemCOMMunicatel AN ADDbess 113  GvVGTemCGOMMuntcatel AN APP vi 113  SYSTem COMMunicate LAN CLASS   seeeseseeesesessesrerersrsrsrererersrersrersrsrsrsrerererererererererererererererett 113  GvVGTemCOMMunicatel AN DEFauh 113  GVGTemCGOMMuntcatel AN DE GCrption   teer eetn tetr nstrnsttnsrnssrnssrnssinssrnssrnssrnnsrnnsnnnt 114  SYSTem COMMunicate LAN DNSadreSS    aeeeeeeseeeeesersrersrerersrerererersrsrsrsrererererersrerererererererererene 114  GvVGTemCOMMunicatel AN GWAldress 114  GvVGTemCOMMunicatel AN HOT  114  SYSTem COMMunicate LAN PASSword   eesesesesesesesesesessrsrerereesrerererersrsrsrsrerererererererererererererererene 1
152. ified in LIST FUNC  Note that it returns only the  total number of points  not the point values     Query Syntax  SOURce  LIST VOLTage POINts   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt     Example LIST  VOLT POIN   Related Commands LIST VOLT       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 88    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 16 5 List   Repeat    LIST REPeat   COUNT     This command sets the sequence of repeat values for each data list point  The repeat values  are given in the command parameters  which are separated by commas The order in which  the points are entered determines the sequence in which they are repeated when a list is  triggered     Command Syntax  SOURce  LIST REPeat  COUNt   lt NRf  gt   lt NRf  gt   Parameters 0 to 99   Examples LIST REPeat 1 0 5   Query Syntax  SOURce  LIST REPeat     Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   Related Commands LIST PHAS POIN  LIST COUN  LIST DWEL LIST STEP       LIST REPeat POINts     This query returns the number of points specified in LIST REPeat  Note that it returns only  the total number of points  not the point values     Query Syntax SOURce  LIST PHASe POINts   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt    Example IST PHAS POIN    Related Commands IST FREQ LIST DWEL       4 16 6 List   Step    LIST STEP  This command specifies how the list sequencing responds to triggers     e ONCE causes the list to advance only one point after each trigger  Triggers that arrive  during a dwell delay are ignored     e AUTO causes the entire 
153. interface may be used to install updated firmware for the controller if needed   Firmware updates and a Flash Loader utility program and instructions are available from the  AMETEK Programmable Power website for this purpose   www programmablepower com      Multiple USB connections to same PC     The Windows driver used to interface to the power source   s USB port emulates a serial com  port  This virtual com port driver is unable to reliable differentiate between multiple units  however so the use of more than one AC power source connected to the same PC via USB  is not recommended  Use of the GPIB interface is recommended for these situations     1 4 3 LAN Capabilities of the AC source    All AC source functions are programmable over the LAN  Ethernet  interface if the  LAN  option is installed  The LAN capabilities of the AC source are listed in Chapter 2 of the  User s Manual  Some capabilities support on the GPIB interface such as ATN  GET and  SRQ interrupts do not apply to the LAN interface  The LAN interface operates internally at a  fixed baudrate of 460800 baud but autodetection of 10Base T  100Base T and 1000Base T  is supported     To set up the LAN interface on a Windows XP PC  refer to section 3 5     LAN Interface  Option        1 4 4 RS232C Capabilities of the AC source    All AC source functions are programmable over the RS232C interface  The RS232C  capabilities of the AC source are listed in Chapter 2 of the User s Manual  Some capabilities  support on the
154. ion and signal levels for the function strobe signal      Command Syntax OUTPut TTLTrg  STATe  lt bool gt   Parameters 0 1 OFFION      RST Value OFF   Examples OUTP TTLT 1 OUTP TTLT OFF    Query Syntax OUTPut TTLTrg  STATe    Returned Parameters OI   Related Commands OUTP TTLT SOUR       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 72    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    OUTPut TTLTrg SOURce    This command selects the signal source for the Trig Out signal as follows     e BOT Beginning of transient output  e EOT End of transient output  e LIST Specified by the TTLTrg list    When an event becomes true at the selected TTLTrg source  a pulse is sent to the the  function strobe on the system interface connector on the rear panel of the AC DC source     Command Syntax OUTPut TTLTrg SOURce lt source gt   Parameters BOT EOT LIST    RST Value BOT   Examples OUTP TTLT SOUR LIST    Query Syntax OUTPut TTLTrg SOURce   Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt   Related Commands OUTP TTLT       4 10 5 Programmable Impedance  iX series only   OUTPut IMPedance  STATe   iX series only   Phase Selectable    This command enables or disables the source output impedance programming  The state of  a disabled output impedance is equivalent to the minimum impedance  The query form  returns the output state     Command Syntax OUTPut IMPdance  STATe  lt bool gt    Parameters 0   OFF   1   ON    RST Value OFF   Examples OUTP IMP 1 OUTP IMP STAT ON   Query Syntax OUTPut IMPdeance  STATe     Retur
155. irst turned on  it wakes up with the output state defined by the  PONSetup  In this state the output voltage is set to a value defined by the INIT VOLT  The  following commands are given implicitly at power on     RST    CLS    SRE 0     ES E  0   RST is a convenient way to program all parameters to a known state  Refer to Table 5 1  under the  RST command in paragraph 5 9 to see how each programmable parameter is    set by  RST  Refer to the  PSC command in chapter 0 for more information on the power on  initialization of the  ESE and the  SRE registers                 6 2 2 Enabling the Output    To enable the output  use the command   OUTPut ON    6 2 3 AC Voltage and Frequency  The AC rms output voltage is controlled with the VOLTage command  For example  to set  the AC output voltage to 125 volts rms  use   MODE AC  VOLTage 125    The DC output voltage is controlled with the VOLTage DC command  For example  to set  the DC output voltage to 100 volts DC  use        MODE DC  VOLTage DC 100    The AC DC power source can be programmed to turn off its output if the actual output  voltage does not agree within a given tolerance with the set value using the measurement  query command        Maximum Voltage  The maximum rms output voltage that can be programmed can be queried with     VOLTage  MAX    The maximum voltage that the AC DC source can output is limited by the maximum peak  voltage capability of the AC DC source  This value is expressed in the equivalent rms value  of 
156. iver   e Hewlett Packard HP 82335A GP IB Controller using the SICL driver library   3 1 Assigning the IEEE 488 Address    The AC DC source address can be set remotely or localy  All i and ix Series AC DC source  are shipped with the IEEE 488 address set to 1 from the factory  Once the address is set   you can assign it inside programs  Note that some PC IEEE 488 controller interface cards  may require you to run a setup utility to assign the AC DC source address  In most cases  however  the instrument address can be set from the application program     For systems using the National Instruments driver  the address of the IEEE 488 controller is  specified in the software configuration program located in the Windows 95   control panel   This is not the instrument address  The controller often uses 0 as its own address so the use  of O as an instrument address should be avoided  The AC DC source address can be  assigned dynamically in the application program   see the National Instruments GP IB  documentation supplied with the controller card      3 2 GPIB Controllers    The Agilent 82350B and National Instruments PCI GPIB are two popular GPIB controllers for  the PC platform  Each is briefly described here  See the software documentation supplied  with the controller card for more details     3 2 1 Agilent 82350B Controller    The Agilent 82350B GPIB PCI card supports the VISA instrument driver library  which  provides software compatabilty accross all many GPIB controllers  We
157. l to maintain the correct path within the voltage and  current subsystems and the use of the root specifier to move between subsytems  The   Enhanced Tree Walking Implementation  given in appendix A of the IEEE 488 2 standard is  not implemented in the AC DC source     Including Common Commands    iM Series   i Series     X Series 15    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    You can combine common commands with system commands in the same message  Treat  the common command as a message unit by separating it with a semicolon  the message  unit separator   Common commands do not affect the active header path  you may insert  them anywhere in the message     VOLTage TRIGger 7 5  TRG  OUTPut OFF OUTPut ON  RCL 2    2 3 Using Queries       Observe the following precautions with queries     Set up the proper number of variables for the returned data       Read back all the results of a query before sending another command to the AC  source  Otherwise a Query Interrupted error will occur and the unreturned data will be  lost     2 4 Structure of a SCPI Message  SCPI messages consist of one or more message units ending in a message terminator  The    terminator is not part of the syntax  but implicit in the way your programming language  indicates the end of a line  such as a newline or end of line character      2 4 1 The Message Unit    The simplest SCPI command is a single message unit consisting of a command header  or  keyword  followed by a message terminat
158. lXed The output frequency is unaffected by a triggered output transient    STEP The output frequency is programmed to the value set by  FREQuency TRIGgered when a triggered transient occurs    PULSe The output frequency is changed to the value set by  FREQuency TRIGgered for a duration determined by the pulse commands    LIST The output frequency is controlled by the frequency list when a triggered  transient occurs    SENSe Selects external sync mode    EXTernal Selects external clock input     Command Syntax  SOURce  FREQuency MODE  lt mode gt   Parameters FIXed   STEP   PULSe   LIST SENSe EXT     RST Value FlXed   Examples FREQ MODE FIX    Query Syntax  SOURce  FREQuency MODE   Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt   Related Commands FREQ FREQ TRIG       iM Series   i Series     X Series 77    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    FREQuency SLEW    This command sets the rate at which frequency changes for all programmed changes in  output frequency  Instantaneous frequency changes can be obtained by sending MAXimum     Command Syntax  SOURce  FREQuency SLEW  IMMediate   lt NRf  gt   Parameters 0 01 to 1E9   MAXimum   Unit Hz  Hertz per second     RST Value MAXimum    Examples FREQ SLEW IMM 75FREQ SLEW MAX  Query Syntax  SOURce  FREQuency SLEW   Returned Parameters  lt NRf gt    Related Commands FREQ SLEW MODE FREQ       FREQuency SLEW MODE    This command determines how the frequency slew rate is controlled during a triggered  output transient  The choices a
159. lad aos 98  Source  Subsystem  Voltage iirinn estenent colinas den ve NO E TAA alfiler 101  Status Subsystem Commande AAA 106  ER EE 110  Trace Subsystem Commands  IX series only          ceecceeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeseaeeeeaeeseaeeeneeeteaeeesatens 117  Trigger SUBSYSTEM ves  cidcid ian eds tenes eid 119    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 6    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    5  Common  Command Szira ers aena ei Stacia ts 124  5 1 A DEIN E goers eek OG a SNe tees ea E E eee Sat Tt 125  5 2 ESE ee ee eg elit lada ee eee talud besos 125  5 3 NS ME 126  5 4 NIR KEE 126  5 5 CIE nation 126  5 6 EE 127  5 7 NEE 128  5 8 RG EE 128  5 9  ROI  dedi aay seemed aie iene vid eh pete E ded elder nade eerste aed 129  5 10 SSA Vara tae a es Meh ease speed eer ee ere 130  5 11 KEE EE 130  5 12 EIN AAA Naseset EE 131  5 13 TRAG ciel ig ita see etek a ee ea 131  5 14 Ace Pet tes e e e 132  6  Programming Examples         ccecsecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeenseaeseensneeeeenseeseesseeeeeenseeneeenees 133  6 1 Ittre ee Le 133  6 2 Programming  the  el ue LE 134  6 3 Coupled  Commands Huracan ee Be Rn Re i ee ate 138  6 4 Programming Output Transient       0    ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeceaeeseaeeseaeeseaeeseaeeseaeeteaeeseaeeseeeeeaeenes 139  6 5 Triggering  Output  Changes iii A NE Di 144  6 6 Acquiring Measurement Data    147  6 7 Controlling the Instantaneous Voltage and Current Data Buffers           essseeseesseeseeeseeseeereeserneneeee 152  6 8
160. librate full scale output voltage at low voltage  range   Trim output voltage offset at low voltage range    Calibrate full scale output voltage at low voltage  range and high frequency     Calibrate full scale output voltage at high voltage  range   Trim output voltage offset at high voltage range    Calibrate full scale output voltage at high voltage  range and high frequency     Calibrate full scale output dc positive voltage at low  voltage range   Calibrate full scale output dc negative voltage at low  voltage range   Trim output dc voltage offset at low voltage range     Calibrate full scale output dc positive voltage at  high voltage range   Calibrate full scale output dc negative voltage at  high voltage range   Trim output dc voltage offset at high voltage range     1EC413 harmonic high frequency    Calibrate the real part of the programmable output  impedance at full scale value  Calibrate the real part of the programmable output  impedance at minimum value    Calibrate the reactive part of the programmable  output impedance at full scale value   Calibrate the reactive part of the programmable  output impedance at minimum value   1EC413 interharmonic    37    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 2 1 Password    CALibrate PASSword    This command allows the entry of the calibration password  The calibration password is  required to use the data entry form of the calibration commands  Without the use of this  password  only the query form can 
161. list to be output sequentially after the starting trigger  paced by  its dwell delays  As each dwell delay elapses  the next point is immediately output     Command Syntax  SOURce  LIST STEP lt step gt   Parameters ONCE   AUTO    RST Value AUTO   Examples LIST STEP ONCE    Query Syntax  SOURce  LIST STEP   Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt   Related Commands LIST COUN LIST DWEL       iM Series   i Series     X Series 89    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 16 7 List TTL Trigger Out    LIST TTLTrg    This command sets the sequence of Trigger Out list points  Each point which is set ON will  cause a pulse to be output at Trigger Out  Function strobe signal on the system interface   when that list step is reached  Those entries which are set OFF will not generate Trigger Out  pulses  The order in which the list points are given determines the sequence in which Trigger  Out pulses will be output when a list transient is triggered     Command Syntax  SOURce  LIST TTLTrg lt bool gt    lt bool gt   Parameters 0 1 OFFION   Examples LIST TTLT 1 0 1 LIST TTLT ON OFF ON  Query Syntax LIST TTLT     Returned Parameters 0 1  Related Commands LIST TTLT POIN  LIST COUN LIST DWEL  LIST STEP OUTP TTLT STAT OUTP TTLT SOUR       LIST TTLTrg POINts     This query returns the number of points specified in LIST TTLT  Note that it returns only the  total number of points  not the point values     Query Syntax  SOURce  LIST TTLTrg POINts   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt     E
162. ll be retained when it is  saved in the register when the AC source is turned off     Note  If the transient list is programmed over the bus  the transient must be  executed at least once or it will not be saved to the setup register  when the  SAV command is sent  Unexecuted transient lists have not  been compiled yet by the AC DC power source controller and will not  be saved as part of a front panel setup  This is not the case when the  transient list is entered from the front panel  Front panel entered  transient lists will be saved even if they have not been executed yet     Lists are paced by a separate list of dwell times which define the duration of each output  setting  Therefore  each of the up to 32 list points has an associated dwell time  which  specifies the time  in seconds  that the output remain at that setting before moving on to the  next setting     The following procedure shows how to generate a simple list of voltage and frequency  changes     Step 1   Set the mode of each function that will participate in the output sequence to LIST   For example     VOLTage MODE LIST  FREQuency MODE LIST    Step 2   Program the list of output values for each function  The list commands take a  comma separated list of arguments  The order in which the arguments are given determines  the sequence in which the values will be output  For example  to cycle the voltage through a  sequence that includes nominal line  high line  and low line  a list may include the following  
163. low a voltage range change without opening the output relay although the output  voltage was dropped during the range change anyway  This change was made to prevent  any spurious output from the power source during a voltage range change from affecting the  EUT  Thus  the net effect is the same but existing test programs written for units with older  firmware may have to be modified to accommodate this change     Thus  replace any   VOLT RANG 300   With the following two commands  do not combine both into a single command    OUTP 0  VOLT RANG 300   OUTP 1    Command Syntax  SOURce  VOLTage RANGe  LEVel   lt NRf  gt   Parameters Series   135   270 or 150   300  Either mode    Series I  150   300  AC mode  200   400  DC mode    RST Value Defined by the PONSetup RANGe    Examples VOLT RANG 150 VOLT RANG MIN  Query Syntax  SOURce  VOLTage RANGe    Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt    Related Commands VOLT RANG PAIR OUTP       iM Series   i Series     X Series 103    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    VOLTage RANGe PAIR  iX series only     This command applies to Series   models only and sets the voltage range pair of the power  source  Currently the voltage range pairs are 135 270 and 150 300  The voltage range pair  defines the voltage ranges of the power source  On Series Il models  the range pair is  always 150 300 in AC and AC DC modes or 200 400 in DC mode     Note that sending the VOLT RANG PAIR command will result in the selected power source  voltage
164. lt bool gt  Select rms current limit protection mode   DELay Set the delay in seconds before protection is  enabled  CURRent  Phase selectable    This command sets the rms current limit of the output  If the output current exceeds this limit   the output voltage amplitude is reduced until the rms current is within the limit if the current  protection mode is disabled and the current protection delay time is expired  The CL bit of  the questionable status register indicates that the current limit control loop is active  If the  current protection state is programmed on  the output latches into a disabled state when  current limiting occurs and the current protection delay time is expired     Note that the CURRent command is coupled with the VOLTage  RANGe and SOURce   MODE  commands  This means that the maximum current limit that can be programmed at a given  time depends on the voltage range setting and the voltage mode  DC or AC  in which the  unit is presently operating        Command Syntax  SOURce  CURReni  LEVel     IMMediate   AMPLitude  lt NRf  gt    Parameters  lt NR2 gt    Unit A  rms amperes     RST Defined by the PONSetup CURRent    Examples CURR 5 CURR LEV  5   Query Syntax  SOURce  CURRent  LEVel     IMMediate   AMPLitude     Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt    Related Commands CURR PROT STAT VOLT RANG MODE       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 75    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    CURRent PROTection STATe    This command selects overcu
165. ltage that can be programmed is 300 V rms  If a custom  waveform is selected for a given phase  the maximum programmable rms voltage may be  obtained by the program by using the VOLT  MAX query  This query will return the maximum  possible rms voltage that can be programmed without exceeding the 425 Volt peak voltage  limitation  This feature can be used to avoid unnecessary error messages during program  execution     Note  You cannot program a voltage that produces a higher peak voltage on  the output than a 300 Vrms sinewave when in the 300 V range     Command Syntax  SOURce  FUNCtion  SHAPe   IMMediate  lt shape gt   Parameters SINusoid SQUare CSINe  lt waveform_name gt      RST Value SINe   Examples FUNC SIN FUNC TABLE1    Query Syntax  SOURce  FUNCtion  SHAPe    Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt   Related Commands FUNC MODE       iM Series   i Series     X Series 80    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    FUNCtion MODE  Phase selectable    This command determines how the waveform shape is controlled during a triggered output  transient  The choices are     FlXed The waveform shape is unaffected by a triggered output transient   LIST The waveform shape is controlled by the waveform shape list when a  triggered transient occurs     Command Syntax  SOURce  FUNCtion  SHAPe  MODE lt mode gt   Parameters FlXed   STEP   PULSE   LIST    RST Value FlXed   Examples FUNC MODE LIST    Query Syntax  SOURce  FUNCtion  SHAPe   MODE   Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt 
166. lue indicates the absence of a specific option  For a list of  returned parameters  refer to the  OPT  command section in this manual     Command Syntax  Parameters     Example  Returned Parameters  Related Commands    iM Series   i Series     X Series    SYSTem CONFigure  n a   SYST CONF    lt CRD gt     OPT        111    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    SYSTem CONFigure NOUTput    Sets the mode configuration of the power source to single phase or a three phase mode   The MODE option must be enabled for this command to work  If MODE option is not  available  the query response will be FIX     Command Syntax SYSTem CONFigure NOUT put lt noutput mode gt    Parameters ONEPhase or THReephase Note  Series IN or Series Il ix  1or3 Note  Series II iX   Example SYST CONF NOUT ONE    Query Syntax SYSTem CONF    Query response ONE  THREE or FIX Note  Query response CRD differs  from parameter format on this command    Returned Paramters  lt CRD gt        SYSTem ETIMe     This command will return the total number of accumulated hours  minutes and seconds     Command Syntax SYSTem ETIMe   Parameters none   Example SYST ETIM   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   lt NR1 gt   lt NR1 gt        SYSTem TEMPerature     This command will return the internal ambient temperature of the AC DC power source in  degrees Celsius     Command Syntax SYSTem TEMPerature   Parameters none   Example SYST TEMP    Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess   
167. ly be adjusted as needed  Thus  if the PONS VRAN is set to 150 and the     VOLT RANG PAIR 135 270    is sent  the PONS VRAN setting will change from 150 to 135   The new range selection will take effect as well so the power source will be in the 135 V  range after receiving the    VOLT RANG PAIR 135 270    command     For Series Il models  the voltage range pair is always 150 300 and changing this setting has  no effect     Command Syntax  SOURce  VRANge lt NRf  gt   Parameters 135  270 or 1501300  Examples PONS VRAN 135    Query Syntax PONS VRAN   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 95    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    PONSetup NOUTput    This command sets the configuration of the power source to one phase or three phase if this  option is enabled     Command Syntax  SOURce  PONSetup NOUT put  lt selection gt   Parameters ONEPhase THReephase LAST  Examples PONS NOUT LAST    Query Syntax PONS NOUT   Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt        PONSetup OUTPut  RELay     This command sets the initial state of the output relay at the power on     Command Syntax  SOURce  PONSetup OUT Put  RELay  lt boolean gt   Parameters 0 1 OFFION   Examples OUTP ON OUTP 0   Query Syntax PONS OUTP    Returned Parameters   OI       PONSetup OLOad  MODE     This command determines how the power source will react to an over current condition  In  const current mode  the output voltage is reduced to a value that maintains a constant laod  cu
168. m each time a triggered action is desired   To keep a trigger system initiated for multiple actions without having to send an initiate  command for each trigger  use     INITiate CONTinuous ON  Selecting the Trigger Source    The trigger system is waiting for a trigger signal in the Initiated state  Before generating a  trigger  a trigger source must be select     To select IEEE 488 bus triggers  group execute trigger  device trigger  or  TRG command    use     TRIGger SOURce BUS  To select a trigger source that is always true  use   TRIGger  SOURce IMM    The immediate source can be combined with INITiate CONTinuous ON to generate  repetitive output transients  A transition from the Initiated state to the Delay state is made  when the trigger signal is received     6 5 3 Synchronizing Output Changes to a Reference Phase Angle    An output transient normally occurs immediately when the trigger signal is received  For  some applications it is desirable for the transient to be synchronized with a particular phase  of the output waveform such as the zero crossing point  0    or the positive peak  90        To synchronize the start of a transient with a particular phase angle of the internal phase  reference  you must select PHASE as the trigger source  Use     TRIGger SYNC SOURce PHASe  To select the desired phase  use   TRIGger SYNC PHASe 90    which specifies the 90 degree phase angle of the internal phase reference as the point  where the transient begins     To turn off tran
169. mand Syntax  SAV    Parameters 0 through 7  Related Commands PSC  RCL  RST       5 11  SRE       This command sets the condition of the Service Request Enable Register  This register  determines which bits from the Status Byte Register  see  STB for its bit configuration  are  allowed to set the Master Status Summary  MSS  bit and the Request for Service  RQS   summary bit  A 1 in any Service Request Enable Register bit position enables the  corresponding Status Byte Register bit and all such enabled bits then are logically ORed to  cause Bit 6 of the Status Byte Register to be set  See paragraph 7 5 for more details  concerning this process     When the IEEE 488 BUS controller conducts a serial poll in response to SRQ  the RQS bit is  cleared  but the MSS bit is not  When  SRE is cleared  by programming it with 0   the source  cannot generate an SRQ to the controller     Command Syntax    SRE  lt NRf gt   Parameters 0 to 255   Default Value 0  see  PSC command   Example    SRE 255    Query Syntax  SRE   Returned Paramters  lt NR1 gt  Register binary value   Related Commands  ESE  ESR       iM Series   i Series     X Series 130    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    5 12  STB        This query reads the Status Byte register  which contains the status summary bits and the  Output Queue MAV bit  Reading the Status Byte register does not clear it  The input  summary bits are cleared when the appropriate event registers are read  see chapter 7 for  more in
170. me     Command Syntax IEC4130SWing DWELI  lt NRf  gt   Parameters   Examples 1EC413 0SWing DWEL 10  Query Syntax 1EC413 0SWing DWEL   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt        1EC413 0SWing PAUSe    This command will set the pause time in seconds  This is the time between tests when  RUN ALL is selected  The class must be selected prior to this command  Query with min  and max to find the range of the pause time     Command Syntax 1EC413 0SWing PAUSe  lt NRf  gt   Parameters  Examples 1EC413 0SWing PAUS 2    Query Syntax 1EC413 0SWing PAUS   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 177    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    1EC413 SWEep LEVel    This command will set the level for the harmonics sweep test  The command will accept  either one parameter or five parameters  In case of one parameter  the level will be set for  the selected range only  The IEC413 STATe must be in the off position and the user class is  selected to accept the command     Command Syntax 1EC413 SWEep LEVel  lt NRf gt    lt NRf1   NRf4  gt   Parameters 0 to 20     Examples 1EC413 SWE LEVel 10  Query Syntax 1EC413 SWE LEVel   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        IEC413 SWEep DWELI    This command will set the dwell time in seconds for the entire sweep range  The class must  be selected prior to this command  Query with min and max to find the range of dwell time     Command Syntax IEC413 SWEep DWELI  lt NRf  gt   Parameters  lt nrf gt    Examples 1EC41
171. me     Set sweep interharmonics level  Set sweep dwell time     Get interharmonics current   Get interharmonics current at resonant    Get interharmonics frequency  Get interharmonics frequency at resonant    Set harmonics level     172    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments     PHASe Set harmonics phase     DWELI Set harmonics dwell     PAUSe Set harmonics pause    IHARmonics    LEVel Set interharmonics level     DWELI Set interharmonics dwell     PAUSe Set interharmonics pause     1EC413 STATe    This command will enable the 1EC413 and initialize the associated data  Note that user  defined test levels for the USER group can only be programmed when the IEC413 state is    OFF     Command Syntax  Parameters  Examples    Query Syntax  Returned Parameters    1EC413 RUN    1EC413 STATe  lt state gt    lt ON OFF 1 0  gt   1EC413 STAT ON  1EC413 STAT    lt boolean gt        This command will run the test  The parameters will define the section of test to be run  If  GROUP is run  the group selected with the IEC413 GROUp command will run     Command Syntax  Parameters  Examples   Query Syntax  Returned Parameters    1EC413 PAUSe    IEC413 RUN  lt group gt     lt  ALL GROup RANGe POINt  gt   IEC413 RUN ALL  IEC413 RUN     lt group gt        This command will cause the test to pause at the time the command is issued     Command Syntax  Parameters  Examples   Query Syntax  Returned Parameters    1EC413 CLASs    1EC413 PAUSe  lt boolean gt   ONJOFF 1 0  1EC413 PAUS
172. ments    4 2 3 Measurement   Voltage    CALibrate MEASure VOLTage  AMBient   AC   FSCale   lt NRf gt     This command initiates the calibration of the rms voltage measurement at full scale and at  ambient temperature     Command Syntax CALibrate MEASure VOLTage  AMBient   AC   FSCale   Parameters  lt NRf gt   actual rms output voltage measured with external device   Examples CAL MEAS VOLT 120    Query Syntax CALibrate MEASure VOLTage   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   value range  1000 to  1000   Related Commands CALibrate MEASure VOLTage TEMPerature   AC   FSCale        CALibrate MEASure VOLTage  AMBient  DC  FSCale   lt NRf gt     This command initiates the calibration of the DC voltage measurement at full scale and at  ambient temperature     Command Syntax CALibrate MEASure VOLTage  AMBient  DC  FSCale   Parameters  lt NRf gt   actual DC output voltage measured with external device   Examples CAL MEAS VOLT DC 120   Query Syntax CALibrate MEASure VOLTage DC    Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   value range  1000 to  1000    Related Commands CALibrate MEASure VOLTage TEMPerature DC  FSCale        CALibrate MEASure VOLTage  AMBient  DC ZERO  lt NRf gt     This command initiates the offset adjustment of the DC voltage measurement at ambient  temperature     Command Syntax CALibrate MEASure VOLTage  AMBient  DC ZERO  Parameters  lt NRf gt   0 or desired offset value    Examples CAL MEAS VOLT DC ZERO 0   Query Syntax CALibrate MEASure VOLT DC ZERO    Returned Parameters  lt NR1 g
173. meters  lt NR2 gt   Related Commands INST NSEL       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 63    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 7 Frequency Measurement Subsystem    This subsystem programs the frequency measurement capability of the i iX Series source   Subsystem Syntax    MEASure    SCALar       FREQuency  Returns the output frequency    MEASure FREQuency     This query returns the output frequency in Hertz     Query Syntax MEASure  SCALar  FREQuency   Parameters None    Examples MEAS FREQ   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 64    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 8 Power Measurement Subsystem    This subsystem programs the power measurement capability of the      X Series source   Subsystem Syntax  MEASure   FETCh      SCALar    POWer    AC     REAL   Returns real power   APParent  Returns VA  PFACtor  Returns power factor  DC Return the dc component of power measurement    MEASure POWer  AC    FETCh POWer  AC      Phase Selectable    This query returns the in phase component of power being sourced at the output terminals in  kilo watts  KW   The query should be used only when the voltage mode is set for AC or  AC DC  In DC mode  the same value as the DC power reading will be returned if this  command is used     Query Syntax MEASure  SCALar  POWer  AC    REAL    Parameters None  Examples MEAS POW AC     Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   Related Commands None       MEASure POWer AC APP
174. n nn rn 154  Figure 7 1   Status System Model 156  Table of Tables   Table 4 1   PULSe HOLD   WIDTH pDarameiers stnn nnnn nenn nnt 99  Table 4 2   PULSe HOLD   DOY Cle parameters   ooocccinococoncccnonnnononcnonoccnancn nn nn naar cnn nn cnn ranma 99  Table 5 1    RST default parameter values cnn nc cnn naar cnn rca 129  Table 7 1   Operation Status Register    ooooocconnccincconnncnnnoccnonccnnnrnnn nan nnnn cnn rca rca 155  Table 7 2   Configuration of Status Heglster arc nn anna 157  Table 7 3  Questionable Status Register   ooooncccinccinnncnonocnnonccconnnnnnonnnnnnc cnn nn nan nana cnn nr nr 158  Table E ge O iaa tias 205    iM Series   i Series     X Series 8    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    1  Introduction    This manual contains programming information for the i Series and iX Series AC DC Power  Sources  This manual contains the following chapters     Chapter 1 Introduction   Chapter 2 Introduction to SCPI   Chapter 3 System Considerations  Chapter 4 SCPI Command Reference  Chapter 5 Common Commands   Chapter 6 Programming Examples  Chapter 7 Status Registers   Chapter 8 i Series Controller Compatability  Chapter 9 Option Commands   Appendix A SCPI command tree    Appendix B SCPI conformance information   Appendix C Error messages    1 1 Documentation Summary       This SCPI programming manual covers both the California Instruments i Series and ix Series  AC DC power sources  A separate User Manual is also supplied with all models in thi
175. nc cnn rra ar rn nnn cananea 185    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 207    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    DO160 NORMal WAVeform DISTOItion           ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaeeseeeeesaeeesaaeeseaeeseaeeesaeeseaeeeeeees 185  DOTO STAN elt diia dsd E A a ia id 189  E  ell MESSAGES  iii ia id 202  Ethernet  gege i aihniet aa aes iti a eee ese ieee eee 32  Est  TQ ic   a ER 72  F  FETCh ARRay CURRent HARMonic PHAS   coooccconoccconcccconccononcnono nn conc cnonnn canon nana cnn nc r arrancan 55  FETCH ARRay GUR RON EE 54  FETCh ARRay VOLTage HARMonic PHAS   dooccccconocccnncccconcccnoncnononnnnnccconn cnn nn rn nan c cnn rca rnn rn nnnn narnia 59  FETCh ARRay VOLTage HARMOnic  ioocccncccccccccnoninononcnanoccnnncnnnnnnnnnn nn nan cn cnn nan nn nana nr nn rra ran naar atenteme nnt 58  FETChAR Ray E o e a lc thE rer acne 58  ai Me Re Bleu 60  FETCh CURRent AMPLitude MAXiIMUM            cceccceceeecececeneceeeseneceeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeaeessensaeessseaaeess 61  FETCh CURRent CREStfactor           cccccceesseceeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeeseaeeseaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseneeee 62  FETCh CURRent HARMonic PHASe     aasnnsnsnnnnnnnnnnssnnnnernrnsttrnnnttnnnnttnnnnttnnnnttn rnnt rnnnst tn nnnnnn annern mnene nn 63  FETCh CURRent HARM onic   HDH    63  FETCh CURRentHARMoOnNiC  rracen aka e EAA AER RONNE Ea TAARE ETEA AA AAE 62   el AE Re EE 61  IN Me H ele EE 66  FETCh POWer  AC  APParent  A 65  FETGh PQWer  AC  PFACtOr  0 5 sess s
176. nd  the harmonic measurement window of the AC source     Subsystem Syntax    SENSe   SWEep   OFFSet  lt n gt  Define trigger points relative to the start of  the digitizer data record   TINTerval  Query the digitizer sample spacing    SENSe SWEep OFFSet    This command defines the trigger point relative to the start of the returned data record when  an acquire trigger is used  The values can range from     UX Series     104 msec to 1000 msec in a single phase configuration and from  312  msec to 1000 msec in a three phase configuration     UX Series Il   42 msec to 1000 msec in a single phase configuration and from  128 msec  to 1000 msec in a three phase configuration     When the value specified is negative  less than 0 msec   the values in the beginning of the  data record represent samples taken prior to the actual trigger moment     Command Syntax SENSe SWEep OFFSet  lt NRf  gt   Parameters  104 to 1000 for single phase configuration    312 to 1000 for three phase configuration   RST Value 0    Examples SENS SWE OFFS  5   Query Syntax SENSe SWEep OFFSet    Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt    Related Commands SENS SWE TINT  MEAS ARR       SENSe SWEep TINTerval     This command query the time period between samples when voltage and current digitization  is controlled by the acquire trigger sequence  The query response of the sample period  query will be     i iX Series    25 6 to 256 psec for single phase and 76 8 to 768 usec for three phase AC DC  source configurations resp
177. ned Parameters 0 1   Related Commands OUTPut IMPedance REAL OUTput IMPedance REACtive       OUTPut IMPedance REAL  iX series only   Phase Selectable    This command sets the real part of the output impedance of the AC source in mili ohms   OUTPut IMPedance STATe must be enabled for the programmed impedance to affect the  output     Command Syntax OUTP IMPedance REAL lt NRf gt   Parameters min to 1000      RST Value min   Examples OUTP IMP REAL 250    Query Syntax OUTPut IMP REAL   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   Related Commands OUTP IMP OUTP IMP REAC       iM Series   i Series     X Series 73    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    OUTPut IMPedance REACtive  iX series only   Phase Selectable    This command sets the reactive part of the output impedance of the AC source in micro  Henry  OUTPut IMPedance STATe must be enabled for the programmed impedance to  affect the output     Command Syntax OUTP IMP REACtive lt NRf gt   Parameters min to 1000  uHenrys      RST Value min   Examples OUTP IMP REAC 700    Query Syntax OUTPut IMP REACtive   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   Related Commands OUTP IMP OUTP IMP REAL       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 74    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 11 Source Subsystem   Current    This subsystem programs the output current of the iX Series source     Subsystem Syntax     SOURce    CURRent    LEVel     IMMediate     AMPLitude   lt n gt  Sets the rms current limit   PROTection   STATe  
178. nic PHASe   iX series only   Phase Selectable    These queries return the phase angle of the Nth harmonic of output current  referenced to  the positive zero crossing of the fundamental component     The parameter is the desired harmonic number  Queries sent with a value of 0 return the dc  component  A value of 1 returns the fundamental output frequency  Harmonic orders can be  queried up to the fundamental measurement bandwidth of the measurement system     UX Series    25 6 microseconds for single phase mode and 76 8 microseconds for three   phase mode   UX Series Il  10 4 microseconds for single phase mode and 31 2 microseconds for three   phase mode     Thus the maximum harmonic that can be measured is dependent on the output frequency   Any harmonics that represent frequencies greater than above frequencies are returned as 0     Query Syntax MEASure  SCALar  CURRent HARMonic PHASe  lt NRf gt   FETCh  SCALar  CURRent HARMonic PHASe  lt NRf gt   Parameters O to 50    Examples MEAS CURR HARM PHAS  3  FETC CURR HARM PHAS  1  Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   Related Commands INST NSEL       MEASure CURRent HARMonic THD     iX series only   FETCh CURRent HARMonic THD   iX series only   Phase Selectable    These queries return the percentage of total harmonic distortion and noise in the output  current     Query Syntax MEASure  SCALar  CURRent HARMonic THD   FETCh  SCALar  CURRent HARMonic THD   Parameters None    Examples MEAS CURR HARM THD  FETC CURR HARM THD   Returned Para
179. nnn nn stnan nnt 188  DO160 ABNormal VOLTage UNDEer cee eeeeaeeeeeee nan cn narran an nn rra nn naar naar nn naneccns 188  BIR e ele EE 189  DO160 EMERgency I  VOLT_FREQ MINiIMUM    0       cceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee scenes ceaeeeeaaeseeeeeseeeeesaeeesaeeneeeeeea 187  DO160 EMERgency VOLTage UNBalance   ococonocccinccccoccccnonanonancnnnn conc cnnnn nc naar nn nan n cnn nn cnn nn nnnn cnn nc 188  DO160 GROUDP EE 190  DO160 NORMal FREQuency MODUIAation   ooooconoccconococoncccnonanononcnano conan cono nc anar nana c carr nnnn nana 186  DO160 NORMal FREQuency TRANsient cn nan nc naar rra rra nr ranas 187  DO160 NORMal FREQuency VARIation    cooococinnccconoccoccccnonnnononcnnno coran cn non canaria nnccnn nn nr rana cnn nn 187  DO160 NORMal VOLT FREQ  MAXIMUM   coccnononcccncnnncnnnononononononcnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnonnnannnononnnnnnonononononnnnnnnn 185  DO160 NORMal VOLT FREOMlNimum   n   nnnannonnnnnnnnnsensnnnnnnnnssssrrnrnnsnssnnrrnrnnsnnsrnirnnnnsnnsrnrnrnnsnnsennt 184  DO160 NORMal VOLTage DC UNDE  cooncccccocconoccnonoccconcccnoncnnnoncnnnn cnn rca nan nn anar nana n can rn nan naar nn nnncccns 186  DO160 NORMal VOLTage INTerrUpt  oooooncccnncconocinonoccconcccnonanononcnnnn cnn nc cnn rca nn nn nr rana nn nnccns 186  DO1G0NOPMal VOL Tage MODulagon  co nnncn cnn ncnnnn nn nr rra nana 185  DO160 NORMal VOLTage SURG sean eeceaeeseaeeseeeeeceaeeesaaeegeaeeseeeesaeeesaeeneneeeed 186  DO160 NORMal VOLTage UNBalance   oococncccinoniconococoncccnonnnononannno cnn n cn nan nc anar nana 
180. now available to the PC   s operating system  To  complete the install process  click on the    Finish    button     To verify the USB port is available  you can access the Windows System Properties screen   select the Hardware tab and open the Windows Device Manager screen  The iX Source  should be listed under    Multi port serial adapters    as shown in the image below      amp  Device Manager  File Action View Help  e gt  048069    4 SOTEC3120X  QA Batteries  Computer  S   Disk drives    Display adapters  iD DVD CD ROM drives     IDE ATA ATAPI controllers  19 Keyboards   2 Mice and other pointing devices  Modems    Monitors  S    S   ix AC Source     B   Network adapters  MY SS 900 PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter    RB OEM Port 1 0 Device Driver  D PCMCIA adapters      Ports  COM  amp LPT   J USB   Serial Port  coms      BD Processors     EI Sound  video and game controllers    oS  2 2 ee ee ee          Figure 3 3  Windows XP Device Manager   USB Port    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 26    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    Step 2  USB to Com Virtual Device Driver installation    The second step allows installation of the USB to COM virtual port driver  This driver will  allow access to the AC source USB interface using a virtual COM port  Many programming  environments support RS232 access but not USB  The use of this driver will allow you to  program the power source through the USB port as though it was an RS232 port  The USB   to COM virtual port
181. nt  cnccccnccconoccnonocononcncnnnnnnnnnnnnnn cc nn cn narran anne nn rana anne 179  IECA 12GwWEepCUlpbengt DATA 178  IEC 41 3 SW Ee p  DW ELM  iiini a us can a a cece ay taebaan canting RO ra evened atacada 178  IEC413 SWEep FREQUCNCY  AA 178  IEC413 SWE6p LEV   Nee Ee ea ee ete eee 178   A i Seal A A ele Se ee 11  Deel 11  JEEESABO iri aie A eae ee a ae a ne CNA  dE 11  IN  Tiate AC Quire 0 00 A A E ea eee 120  INI Tate  CONTINUOUS siii Eege EEGENEN dE eege Ee dacs 120  INITiate  IMMediate  TRANSICN1  AA 120  INST UME NE  COUPE Ton aerae A A eege Eege ade 51  INS Trumen NS ELSE inicia a A a AE 51  INS Trumen SELOG A a NAE e PE EE ETE P EENE EN ERN 52   PES n eai itia a ai A lease ee Ava eee cee es 32    iM Series   i Series     X Series 209    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    L  LAN   A E need eatieertel tay a a a a a a E a 32   MAG  lee 32  LAN Option   PE e ed 32   PON lune 34  EIMMECURAR diia AA A AA ed dade ea E ld ae 82  HME EG ee ii hee ihe 82  LIMIEPHASS oia ocre rodas as o at 83  EIMIEVOL TO niet iaaa ia a 82  LIST  GOUNC   uan aria eaten eit   tait 86  LIST DWE RE 86  LIST  DWELEPOINtS otitis ria tia ede a eee eee ee 86  EN Ra ee Mais Pa nih bah eae eta   ci a ee eh te 87  LIST FREQuency POINtS         cccccecccceeseeseeeeceeeeesaeeeeaaeeaeeeceaeeeeaaesaeeseaeeesaaeseeaaesseneeseaeeesaeseeaaeesenees 87  LIST FREQuencyiSLE Wisin ibid pa dda eeepc eegen 87  LIST FREQuency SLEW POINtS  cooocccinncconncccnocinononanonccnnncc ronca rn 87  LIST
182. ntroller clock and lock  configurations   the PHASe command sets the relative phase of B and C with respect to  phase A     6 2 6 Current Limit    This command will set the rms current limit  to set this limit is     CURRent  lt n gt   where  lt n gt  is the rms current limit in amperes     If the load attempts to draw more current than the programmed limit  and the source is set  for constant current mode  the output voltage is reduced to keep the rms current within the  limit  Since the rms detection involves a filter time constant that is long compared to a single  output cycle  the response time of the rms current limit is not instantaneous     The AC source can be programmed to turn off its output if the rms current limit is reached   This protection feature is activated when the source mode is set for constant voltage mode     Note  The CURRent command is coupled with the VOL Tage RANGe This  means that the maximum current limit that can be programmed at a  given time depends on the voltage range setting in which the unit is  presently operating  Refer to  Coupled Commands  for more  information     6 2 7 Waveform Shapes    At  RST  the AC DC power source generates a sine waveform when in AC or AC DC mode   but other shapes can be selected  There are built in tables for sine  square and clipped sine  waveforms  In addition  the user can define arbitrary waveshapes by creating a 1024 point  table of amplitudes for a single cycle     As shown in the following examples  th
183. nts    This command will set the calibration coefficent for the AC full scale output voltage at the low  voltage range and at high output frequency    Command Syntax CALibrate VOLTage LRANge HFRequency  lt NRf  gt   Parameters  lt NRf gt   a value between  127 and  128   Examples CAL VOLT LRAN HFRequency  10    Query Syntax CALibrate VOLTage LRANge HFRequency   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   value range  127 to  128   Related Commands CAL VOLT LRAN CAL VOLT LRAN ZERO       CALibrate  SOURce  VOLTage  AC  HRANge  FSCale   lt NRf  gt     This command will set the calibration coefficent for the AC full scale output voltage at the  high voltage range     Command Syntax CALibrate VOLTage HRANge  lt NRf  gt    Parameters  lt NRf gt   a value between  127 and  128    Examples CAL VOLT HRAN  2   Query Syntax CALibrate VOLTage HRANge    Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   value range  127 to  128    Related Commands CAL VOLT HRAN ZERO CAL VOLT HRAN HFR       CALibrate  SOURce  VOLTage  AC  HRANge ZERO  lt NRf  gt     This command will set the calibration coefficent for the output voltage offset at the high  voltage range     Command Syntax CALibrate VOLTage HRANge ZERO  lt NRf  gt   Parameters  lt NRf gt   a value between  127 and  128   Examples CAL VOLT HRAN ZERO  10   Query Syntax CALibrate VOLTage HRANge ZERO   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   value range  127 to  128    Related Commands CAL VOLT HRAN CAL VOLT HRAN HFR       CALibrate  SOURce  VOLTage  AC  HRANge HFRequency  lt NRf
184. o be executed     TRIG STATe  This query will report the state of the transient trigger subsystem and will  return IDLE  ARM or BUSY to allow the user monitor the state of the trigger  system     iM Series   i Series     X Series 161    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    8  i Series Controller Compatability    8 1 Introduction       California Instruments continuously improves its products to provide maximum value to its  customers  As part of this ongoing process  the i series AC DC power source has been  outfitted with a faster controller that offers greater throughput on both IEEE 488 and  RS232C  At this same time  the extended capabilities iX version was added to the California  Instruments product line up  To maintain software compatability between the new i series  and the iX series  a few SCPI commands had to be changed  While these change will not  affect the vast majority of users  those that have a mixture of previous generation i series  and new generation i series should be aware of there differences when developing test  programs     This section does not apply to any i Series ll models  Only i Series   models that respond to  the SYST VERS  Query with    1990    are affected by the information in this chapter     If written properly  the same test program can be made to operate with either generation i  series  Programs originally developed for the first generation i series controller may have to  be modified slightly when used with thi
185. og    These commands return a list of defined waveform names  The list includes both pre defined  waveforms such as SINusoid  SQUare  and CSINusoid  as well as any user defined  waveforms     Query Syntax  TRACe CATalog   Returned Parameters  lt SRD gt     Example TRAC CAT   Related Commands TRAC DATA  TRAC DEL FUNC SHAP       TRACe DEFine    These commands define a new waveform with the name  lt waveform_name gt  and allocates  storage for its data  The waveform name can then be referenced by the TRACe DATA    Command Syntax  TRACe DEFine  lt waveform_name gt   Parameters  lt waveform_name gt    Example TRAC DEF flattop   Related Commands TRAC DATA  TRAC DEL FUNC SHAP       TRACe DELete    These commands delete the user defined waveform table with the name  lt waveform_name gt   and makes its memory available for other waveforms     Command Syntax  TRACe DELete  NAME  lt waveform_name gt   Parameters  lt waveform name gt    Example TRAC DEL flattop   Related Commands TRAC DATA TRAC DEL FUNC SHAP       TRACe DELete    This command deletes ALL user defined waveforms at once and makes all waveform  memory available for other waveforms  This command is only supported by firmware  revisions 0 16 and higher     Command Syntax  TRACe DELete ALL  Parameters  lt waveform name gt     Example TRAC DEL ALL  Related Commands TRAC DATA TRAC DEL FUNC SHAP       iM Series   i Series     X Series 118    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 25 Trigger Subsystem    Thi
186. oint  Only an ABORt command can transfer the system out of the Dwelling state     At the end of the dwell interval  the transition to the next state depends on whether or not the  list has completed its sequencing and the state of the LIST STEP command  see 4 16      If the list is completed  the trigger system returns to the Idle state     If the list is not completed  then the system reacts as follows                    LIST STEP ONCE programs the trigger system to return to the Initiated state to wait for  the next trigger    LIST STEP AUTO programs the trigger system to immediately execute the next list  point     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 146    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    6 6 Acquiring Measurement Data    The source has the capability to return a number of current  voltage  and power  measurements  When the AC source is turned on  it is continuously sampling the  instantaneous output voltage and current for several output cycles and writing the results  into a buffer  The buffer holds 4096 voltage and current data points     The AC source uses the data from the voltage and current buffer to calculate the requested  measurement information  Data in the voltage and current buffers is always re acquired for  subsequent measurement requests  There are two ways to make measurements     e Use the MEASure commands to immediately start acquiring new voltage and current  data  and return measurement calculations from this data as soon as th
187. oltage faulted  output voltage differ from program  value    The overcurrent protection circuit has tripped    An overtemperature condition has occurred  The remote shut down state is active  12 Clrms The rms current limit circuit is active    Standard Event Status Group  Operation complete   Query error   Device dependend error    Execution error  Command error  Power on  Status Byte and Service Request Enable Registers  Questionable status summary bit    E E AE  A E EA  Eo  ooe EES il  ETE MEP  ESE  A AAA  E AAA    Message Available summary bit  Event Status Summary bit  Master Status Summary bit  Request Service bit    Operation status summary bit       Table 7 2   Configuration of Status Register    iM Series   i Series     X Series 157    A    C Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments       7 3 Questionable Status Group       The Questionable Status registers record signals that indicate abnormal operation of the AC  source  As shown in Figure 7 1  the group consists of the same type of registers as the  Status Operation group     Condition STAT QUES COND  A register that holds real time status of the  circuits being monitored  It is a read only  register     Event STAT QUES EVEN  A register that latches any condition  It is a  read only register that is cleared when read     Enable STAT QUES ENAB  lt n gt  A register that functions as a mask for  enabling specific bits from the Event  register  It is a read write register     Table 7 3  Questionable Status
188. olution analog to digital conversion  system that requires temperature compensation  Previous generation   series measurement  did not benefit form temperature compensation due to their lower accuracy and resolution  measurements  Also  many of the offset calibrations as well as separate positive and  negative calibration of DC voltage measurement is no longer required  This has required  some changes to the calibration command subsystem  The old and new command    subsystems are shown below     First generation i series measurement calibration subsystem    CALibrate  MEAGure    CURRent    AC     FSCale      ZERO   AMPLitude  MAXampl    FSCALe      ZERO  DC    FSCale      ZERO    POWER    AC     FSCale      ZERO  DC    FSCale      ZERO   VOLTage    AC     FSCale      ZERO  DC    FSCale     POS     NEG     ZERO    Calibrate full scale AC current measurements  Cancel AC current measurements offset    Calibrate full scale AC peak current measurements  Cancel AC peak current offset    Calibrate full scale DC current measurements  Cancel DC current measurements offset    Calibrate full scale AC power measurements  Cancel AC power measurements offset    Calibrate full scale DC power measurements  Cancel DC power measurements offset    Calibrate full scale AC voltage measurements  Cancel AC voltage measurements offset    Calibrate positive full scale DC voltage  measurements   Calibrate negative full scale DC voltage  measurements   Cancel DC voltage measurements offset    New gener
189. om Port    Once completed  you can remove the CIC496 CD Rom  The USB interface to the AC source  is now available for use     iM Series   i Series     X Series 30    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    3 4 2 USB Interface Use    Note that the power source will be detected automatically when turn on or plugged in once  the drivers have been installed  It is recommended however to close any open USB  connections to the AC source before turning it off     To use the USB interface  you may use the Gui Windows software supplied with the power   source or develop your own application code  In either case  set the baud rate on the power  source to 460 800 in the Configuration menu  From the Front panel  press MENU key  scroll  to CONFIGURATION and press ENTER key  Select BAUDRATE field and scroll to 460800     For use with the Gui program  select the    USB   RS232C Serial    interface type and set the  Baud rate to 460800     6  Interface Configuration    Type  RS232 Settings       Simulation mode  e Com    Com3 C Com5 C Com       C Com2    Com4  Comp C Com8  Cancel        NIIEEE 488 Bus Baud   460800   V HA HShk    Help     C Agilent GPIB Verify Connection         C LAN   TCP   IP    CHECK UART FIFO SETTINGS  THEH CLICK VERIFY   See Help   Send Command     SE    Receive        Figure 3 5  Gui Interface Settings for use of USB port     Note  Use of the USB port to control more than one power source from a single PC  is not recommended  as communication may n
190. ommands CAL VOLT HFR       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 45    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 2 6 Output   DC Voltage    CALibrate  SOURce  VOLTage DC LRANge  FSCale    POSitive   lt NRf  gt     This command will set the calibration coefficent for the positive dc full scale output voltage at  the low voltage range     Command Syntax CALibrate VOLTage DC LRANge  lt NRf  gt   Parameters  lt NRf gt   a value between  127 and  128   Examples CAL VOLT DC LRAN  2    Query Syntax CALibrate VOLTage DC LRANge   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   value range  127 to  128   Related Commands CAL VOLT DC LRAN NEG       CALibrate  SOURce  VOLTage DC LRANge  FSCale   NEGative  lt NRf  gt     This command will set the calibration coefficent for the negative dc full scale output voltage  at the low voltage range     Command Syntax CALibrate VOLTage DC LRANge NEGative  lt NRf  gt   Parameters  lt NRf gt   a value between  127 and  128    Examples CAL VOLT DC LRAN NEG  2   Query Syntax CALibrate VOLTage DC LRANge NEG    Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   value range  127 to  128    Related Commands CAL VOLT DC LRAN       CALibrate  SOURce  VOLTage DC LRANge ZERO  lt NRf  gt     This command will set the calibration coefficent for the dc output voltage offset at the low  voltage range     Command Syntax CALibrate VOLTage DC LRANge ZERO  lt NRf  gt   Parameters  lt NRf gt   a value between  127 and  128   Examples CAL VOLT DC LRAN ZERO  10   Query Syntax CALibrate VO
191. on to generate a single triggered output voltage change  use      RST  VOLTage MODE STEP    Step 2   Set the triggered level of the function that will generate the transient  For example  if  the previously programmed voltage function is going to step the output voltage amplitude to  135 volts upon reciept of a trigger  use                 VOLTage TRIGger 135    Step 3   Select the trigger source that will generate the trigger  For example  to select the  Immediate use     TRIGger SOURce IMM  Trigger sources are discussed in detail under    Triggering Output Changes       Step 4   Only perform this step if you have selected PULSE as the transient mode in Step 1   Specify the pulse count  the pulse period  and then either the duty cycle or the pulse width  using the following commands     PULSe COUNt 1 specifies 1 output pulse   PULSe PERiod 1 specifies a pulse period of 1 second   PULSe DCYCle 50 specifies a duty cycle of 50    PULSe WIDTh  5 specifies a pulse width of  5 seconds  not necessary in this case    since a duty cycle has already been specified     Step 5   Initiate the transient trigger system to enable it to receive a trigger  To enable the  trigger system for one transient event use     INITiate  Example    The following example programs a voltage dropout for 2 cycles of a 120 volt  60 Hz output   The dropout begins at the positive peak of the output voltage waveform  90 degrees phase   and is triggered by IEEE 488 bus trigger                        RST Begin at
192. or     FREQuency  lt newline gt        VOLTage  lt newline gt     The message unit may include a parameter after the header  The parameter usually is  numeric  but it can be a string     VOLTage 20 lt newline gt           VOLTage MAX lt newline gt     iM Series   i Series     X Series 16    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    2 4 2 Combining Message Units    The following command message is briefly described here  with details in subsequent  paragraphs        Data  Message Unit  Query Indicator    Headers we ay      VOLT   LEV 80   RANG 135     CURR   lt NI    4    Header Me  Separator ssage  Me Terminator  vias Root Specifier  Separator             Figure 2 2   Command Message Structure    The basic parts of the above message are     Message Component Example    Headers VOLT LEV PROT CURR   Header Separator The colon in VOLT LEV   Data 80 88   Data Separator The space in VOLT 80 and PROT 88   Message Units VOLT LEV 80 PROT 88 CURR    Message Unit The semicolons in VOLT LEV 80  and PROT 88   Separator   Root Specifier The colon in PROT 88  CURR    Query Indicator The question mark in CURR    Message Terminator The  lt NL gt   newline  indicator  Terminators are not part of    the SCPI syntax    2 4 3 Headers    Headers are instructions recognized by the AC DC source  Headers  which are sometimes  known as  keywords   may be either in the long form or the short form     Long Form The header is completely spelled out  such as VOLTAGE   STATUS  and OUTPUT
193. ot be reliable  Use GPIB  interface for multiple power source control     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 31    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    3 5 LAN Interface Option       An Ethernet LAN interface option is available as an option for the iX Series power sources   This option must be specified at the time of order  A    LAN option indicator will appear on the  model number tag at the rear panel of the power source to indicate the presence of this  option  Also  a RJ45 socket will be present on the rear panel     Using LAN lets you communicate with the instrument remotely  it is fast  simple and the LAN  from your PC does not require any additional proprietary software or cards     Note  Ifa USB cable is plugged into the USB interface connector of the  power source  the LAN interface will be disabled  Remove any USB  connection to use the LAN   Ethernet port     An RJ45 Ethernet 10BaseT connector is located on the rear panel if the LAN option is  installed  A standard RJ45 UTP patch cord between the AC Source and a network Hub may  be used to connect the AC source to a LAN  For direct connection to a PC LAN card  a  crossover RJ45 cable is required  Consult your network administrator for directions on  connecting the AC source to any corporate LAN     If the LAN Ethernet interface option is present  the MAC Address  Media Access Control  of  the Ethernet port is printed on the serial tag of the power source  The serial tag is located on  the rea
194. ote programming syntax is part of the Output subsystem     Subsystem Syntax    OUTPut   OMNI    STATe  lt state gt  Select the OMNI state  BYPassed ENGaged     OUTPut OMNI  STATe     This command will engage or bypass the OMNI impedance network  The output voltage will  drop when the state changes     Command Syntax OUTPut OMNI  STATe  state gt   Parameters BYPassed   ENGaged    RST Value BYPassed   Examples OUTP OMNI ENG    Query Syntax OUTPut OMNI  STATe    Returned Parameters BYP ENG  Related Commands None       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 193    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    Appendix A  SCPI Command tree    The following command three contains all the supported commands for the ix series AC DC source   Some command listed may not apply to the i series version  Check the relevant reference section for    specific details on using each of these commands     ABORt   CALibrate  DEE IHARmonics   ere IMPedance  EE REAL  e Ee  FSCale   EE ZERO  EE REACtive    is E  FSCale   EE Ee ZERO  ee a s MEASURE  baie ule Aas CURRent  ele es ES  AMBient   EE  AC   A ais paneled itl a Seria et FSCALe  EE DC  SEAN   otal anh estate  FSCALe   di ZERO  EE TEMP  TEE  AC   a e  FSCALE   pido ta id DC  a Sues  FSCALe   ed rro EE ZERO  O VOLTage  Eer  AMBient   orton ie  AC   EE EE FSCALe  EE DC  E  FSCALe   EE ZERO  EE ege TEMP  orita cette ate  AC   EE EE  FSCALE   EE DC  EE eebe  FSCALe   CHEN due lawns ave ZERO  E PASSWORD  EE  SOURce   E PHASe  E VOLTage  his
195. p 4   Determine the number of times the list is executed before it completes  For  example  to run a list 10 times use   LIST COUNt 10  At  RST  the count is set to 1   Step 5   Determines how the list sequencing responds to triggers  For a closely controlled    sequence of output levels  you can use a dwell paced list  To cause the list to be paced by  dwell time use     LIST  STEP AUTO    As each dwell time elapses  the next point is immediately output  This is also the  RST  setting        If you need the output to closely follow asynchronous events  then a trigger paced list is  more appropriate  In a trigger paced list  the list advances one point for each trigger  received  To enable trigger paced lists use        LIST STEP ONCE    The dwell time associated with each point determines the minimum time that the output  remains at that point  If a trigger is received before the previous dwell time completes  the  trigger is ignored  Therefore  to ensure that no triggers are lost  program the dwell time  minimum              Step 6   Use the transient trigger system to trigger the list  This is described in detail under     Triggering Output Changes       iM Series   i Series     X Series 143    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    6 5 Triggering Output Changes    The following transient trigger sources can be selected     IMMediate Generates a trigger when the trigger system is initiated   BUS Selects IEEE 488 bus triggers     6 5 1 Trigger System Mo
196. r a file path  browse to the CD root drive and then USB_Inf  eg  DAUSB_Inf      Hardware Installation    A The software you are installing for this hardware   iX AC Source    has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility  with Windows XP   Tell me why this testing is important      Continuing your installation of this software may impair  or destabilize the correct operation of your system  either immediately or in the future  Microsoft strongly  recommends that you stop this installation now and  contact the hardware vendor for software that has  passed Windows Logo testing        The USB device drivers have not been Windows XP Logo certified  Due to the limited  distribution of these drivers  this is unlikely to be done  This Logo certification has no  bearing on the functionality or legitimacy of this device driver so you can ignore this  message  Click the    Continue Anyway    button to continue  Note that some PCs may have  this verification disabled in which case this screen will not pop up     The installation will now proceed  This process may take several minutes to complete  Once  completed  the final dialog will appear as shown     iM Series   i Series     X Series 28    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual    California Instruments       Found New Hardware Wizard    iM Series   i Series   iX Series    Completing the Found New  Hardware Wizard    The wizard has finished installing the software for     y USB   Serial Port  es    Click Finish to close
197. r panel of the unit     3 5 1 MAC Address    Each power source with the  LAN option installed has a unique network address  MAC  address   The MAC address  Media Access Conrol  is a unique hexadecimal address and is  listed on a label on the rear panel of the power source  To operate the power source on a  network  this MAC address needs to be assigned to a TCP IP address  which will be used to  address the device on the network     3 5 2 Setting the TCP IP Address    The first decision you need to make is how to connect the instrument  You can connect the  instrument directly to a network LAN port with a LAN cable  or you can connect it directly to  the PC  When connecting the instrument directly to the PC LAN port you will need a special  cable called a cross connect cable  Once connected you must establish an IP address for  the instrument  An IP address consists of four groups of numbers separated by a decimal   Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol  DHCP  is typically the easiest way to configure the  instrument for LAN communication  DHCP automatically assigns a dynamic IP address to a  device on a network  You will need to enter the IP address on the Interface screen of the  GUI to control the power source     The GUI has a built in utility that let s you determine the IP address assigned by the network  DHCP server  It may also be used to set a static IP address  To use the LAN option   ClGuiSll version 2 1 0 0 or higher is required  The latest ClGuiSIll version can be 
198. r to  user manual 4994 970 for connector pin out information     Unlike RS232  there are no generic drivers available as a rule for use in programming  environments such as LabView  LabWindows CVI or Visual Basic     A virtual serial port utility is provided on CD ROM CIC496  which ships with the power  source  This utility will provide a virtual COM port on a PC under Windows XP  This allows  programs to use the USB port as though it is a regular serial port on the PC  The baud rate  for this mode of operation is fixed at 460 800  The USB Serial Adaptor installation must be  run to install the virtual com port driver  This option is only supported under Windows XP at  this time     Note  Use of the USB port to control more than one power source from a single PC  is not recommended  as communication may not be reliable  Use GPIB  interface for multiple power source control     3 4 1 USB Driver Installation    When connecting the AC source through the USB interface to Windows XP PC  the  presence of a new USB device will be detected  Windows will display a dialog after a short  delay prompting the user to install the USB device drivers  There are two steps to this  process     The first one installs the USB decive itself  The second step allows installation of the USB to   COM virtual port driver  This driver will allow access to the AC source USB interface using a   virtual COM port  Many programming environments support RS232 access but not USB  The  USB to COM virtual port 
199. rallel with other  commands  Commands that affect output voltage or state  relays  and trigger actions are  overlapped with subsequent commands sent to the AC source  The  WAI command  prevents subsequent commands from being executed before any overlapped commands  have been completed     The    WAI command may be used when performing measurement queries  MEAS or FETCh   to force the AC DC source to respond to the query before processing any subsequent  command        WAI can be aborted by sending any other command after the    WAI command     Command Syntax    WAI    Parameters None  Related Commands  OPC       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 132    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    6  Programming Examples    6 1 Introduction       This chapter contains examples on how to program the AC DC source  Simple examples  show you how to program     Output functions such as voltage  frequency  and phase  The transient waveform generator   Internal and external triggers   Measurement functions   User defined waveforms   The status and protection functions    The examples in this chapter use generic SCPI commands  See chapter 2 for information  about encoding the commands as language strings  Where appropriate  optional commands  are shown for clarity in the examples     iM Series   i Series     X Series 133    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    6 2 Programming the Output       6 2 1 Power on Initialization    When the AC source is f
200. rce SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 5 3 Voltage Array Data    MEASure ARRay VOLTage  DC    FETCh ARRay VOLTage  DC      Phase Selectable    These queries return an array containing the instantaneous output voltage in volts  The data  returned in arbitrary block data format as follows      5 lt block length n gt  lt b0 gt  lt b1 gt  lt b2 gt  lt b3 gt       lt bn 3 gt  lt bn  2 gt  lt bn 1 gt  lt bn gt     where b0 b1 b2 b3 are four hex bytes represent IEEE single precision floating number   where bo is the most significant byte and b3 is the least significant byte     The output voltage and current are digitized whenever a measure command is given or  whenever an acquire trigger occurs  The time interval between samples is     UX Series    25 6 microseconds for single phase mode and 76 8 microseconds for three   phase mode   UX Series Il  10 4 microseconds for single phase mode and 31 2 microseconds for three   phase mode     The query SENSe SWEep TINTerval  will return the time interval  the position of the trigger  relative to the beginning of the data buffer is determined by SENSe SWEep OFFSet     Query Syntax MEASure ARRay VOLTage  DC     lt n gt    lt n gt    FETCh ARRay VOLTage  DC     lt n gt    lt n gt     Parameters Optional block and offset parameters  lt n gt   lt n gt   Where the first value   lt n gt  is the number of 256 sample blocks to transfer and the second    value  lt n gt  is the first block  offset  to start with  Number of blocks is 
201. rd event status enable   Return standard event status enable  Return event status register   Return instrument identification   Enable  operation complete  bit in ESR  Return a  1  when operation complete  Return option number   Power on status clear state set reset  Return power on status clear state  Recall instrument state   Reset   Save instrument state   Set service request enable register  Return service request enable register  Return status byte   Trigger   Hold off bus until all device commands done       124    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    5 1  CLS       This command clears the following registers  see chapter 7 for descriptions of all status  registers      e Standard Event Status   e Operation Status Event   e Questionable Status Event  e Status Byte    e Error Queue    Command Syntax  CLS  Parameters None    5 2  ESE       This command programs the Standard Event Status Enable register bits  The programming  determines which events of the Standard Event Status Event register  see  ESR   are  allowed to set the ESB  Event Summary Bit  of the Status Byte register  A  1  in the bit  position enables the corresponding event  All of the enabled events of the Standard Event  Status Event Register are logically ORed to cause the Event Summary Bit  ESB  of the  Status Byte Register to be set  See for descriptions of the Standard Event Status registers     The query reads the Standard Event Status Enable register     Bit es of ICA ae Status 
202. re     FlXed The frequency slew rate is unaffected by a triggered output transient    STEP The frequency slew rate is programmed to the value set by  FREQuency TRIGgered when a triggered transient occurs    PULSe The frequency slew rate is changed to the value set by  FREQuency TRIGgered for a duration determined by the pulse commands    LIST The frequency slew rate is controlled by the frequency list when a triggered    transient occurs     Command Syntax  SOURce  FREQuency SLEW MODE lt mode gt   Parameters FlXed   STEP   PULSe   LIST    RST Value FlXed   Examples FREQ SLEW MODE FIX   Query Syntax  SOURce  FREQuency SLEW MODE   Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt    Related Commands FREQ FREQ SLEW TRIG       FREQuency SLEW TRIGgered    This command sets the rate at which frequency changes during a triggered output transient   Instantaneous frequency changes can be obtained by sending MAXimum     Command Syntax  SOURce  FREQuency SLEW TRIGgered  lt NRf  gt   Parameters 0 01 to 1E9   MAXimum   Unit Hz  Hertz per second     RST Value MAXimum    Examples FREQ SLEW TRIG 75 FREQ SLEW TRIG MAX  Query Syntax  SOURce  FREQuency SLEW TRIG    Returned Parameters  lt NRf gt    Related Commands FREQ SLEW MODE FREQ       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 78    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    FREQuency TRIGgered    This command programs the frequency that the output will be set to during a triggered step  or pulse transient     Command Syntax  SOURce  FREQuency TRIGge
203. re 9 6 in the User Manual for characteristic of each level     Command Syntax DO160 NORMal VOLTage INTerrupt  lt NRf gt   Parameters  lt test number gt   Examples DO160 NORM VOLT INT 4    Query Syntax DO160 NORM VOLT INT   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt        DO160 NORMal VOLTage SURG    This command will generate the voltage levels required to generate a normal voltage source   Refer to Section 9 1 4 1  under the heading titled VOLTAGE SURGE  for detail     Command Syntax DO160 NORMal VOLTage SURG  Parameters none   Examples DO160 NORM VOLT SURG  Query Syntax none       DO160 NORMal VOLTage DC UNDer    This command will generate the voltage levels required to generate a normal voltage source   Refer to Section 9 1 in the User Manual under the heading titled VOLTAGE UNDER  for detail     Command Syntax DO160 NORMal VOLTage DC UNDer  Parameters none  Examples DO160 NORM VOLT DC UND       DO160 NORMal FREQuency MODulation    This command will cause output frequency modulation  The level of modulation is the  function of the rate of modulation  Refer to Figure 9 5 in the User Manual  The command  parameter is the rate of modulation in Hz     Command Syntax DO160 NORMal FREQuency MODulation  lt NRf gt   Parameters  lt frequency gt   Examples DO160 NORM FREQ MOD 0 1    Query Syntax DO160 NORM FREQ MOD   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 186    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    DO160 NORMal FREQuency TRANsient    This 
204. re revision is displayed  briefly at power up on the LCD display and can also be queried over the bus by using the   IDN  command     Differences between the two model series are     e Dual voltage range pairs of 135 270 and 150 300 on Series   has been replaced by  single 150 300 voltage range pair and constant power mode of operation     e In DC mode  the voltage ranges have been increased to 200Vdc and 400Vdc     e Auto level control  ALC  mode has been added to Series II models to obtain  improved voltage accuracy and load regulation     e The maximum frequency has been extended to 1000 Hz although the output voltage  derates from 300 Vrms at 500 Hz to 150 Vrms at 1000 Hz     e Reduced number of measurement calibration coefficients on Series II   e Increased measurement sampling rate on Series Il     e Maximum DC offset range in AC DC mode is 250Vdc on Series I  220Vdc on Series  II    e Default mode for trigger out is Function Strobe  FSTR   To switch to Trigger Out  mode  the OUTP TTLT MODE command must be used     USB and LAN Interfaces    Models shipped after July 2007  Top assembly P N 7000 485 and P N 7000 486  are  equipped with GPIB  RS232 and USB interfaces  Older models did not have the USB  interface  These newer models also support a LAN  Ethernet  interface option     Where relevant  differences are highlighted throughout this programming manual  For iX  Series    refer to User Manual P N 7000 970  for iX Series Il  refer to User Manual   N 4994   970     iM 
205. red  lt NRf  gt    Parameters 0 to maximum frequency range specified by the LIMit FREQuency  command   Unit Hz  Hertz     RST Value 60 Hz    Example FREQ TRIG 50   Query Syntax  SOURce  FREQuency TRIGgered   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt    Related Commands FREQ FREQ MODE       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 79    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 13 Source Subsystem   Function  iX series only     This subsystem programs the output function of the AC DC source     Subsystem Syntax     SOURce    FUNCtion    SHAPe     IMMediate   lt shape gt  Sets the periodic waveform shape   SIN SQU CSIN  lt user defined gt      MODE  lt mode gt  Sets the waveform shape mode  FIX LIST    CSINe  lt n gt  Sets the   THD of peak at which the clipped sine  FUNCtion  Phase selectable    This command selects the shape of the output voltage waveform as follows     SINe A sinewave is output  SQUare A squarewave is output  CSINe The output is a clipped sine waveform  Both positive and negative peak    amplitudes are clipped at a value determined by the  SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe CSINusoid setting      lt user_defined gt  The output shape is described by one of the user defined waveform  tables     The maximum peak voltage that the AC source can output is 425 V peak  This includes any  combination of voltage and function shape values  Therefore  the maximum value that can  be programmed depends on the peak to rms ratio of the selected waveform  For a  sinewave  the maximum vo
206. rnia Instruments    VOLTage TRIGgered  Phase Selectable    This command selects the AC rms or DC amplitude that the output voltage will be set to  during a triggered step or pulse transient     Command Syntax SOURce  VOLTage  LEVel  TRIGgered AMPLitude  lt NRf  gt    Parameters 0 to maximum voltage range specified by the LIMit VOLTage  command   Unit V  rms voltage     RST Value 0 volt    Examples VOLT TRIG 120 VOLT LEV TRIG 120   Query Syntax SOURce  VOLTage  LEVel  TRIGgered  AMPLitude    Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt    Related Commands VOLT VOLT MODE       VOLTage MODE  Phase Selectable    This command determines how the output voltage is controlled during a triggered output  transient  The choices are     FlXed The voltage is unaffected by a triggered output transient    STEP The voltage is programmed to the value set by VOLTage TRIGgered when  a triggered transient occurs    PULSe The voltage is changed to the value set by VOLTage TRIGgered for a  duration determined by the pulse commands    LIST The voltage is controlled by the voltage list when a triggered transient  occurs     Command Syntax  SOURce  VOLTage MODE lt mode gt   Parameters FlXed   STEP   PULSe   LIST    RST Value FIX   Examples VOLT MODE LIST VOLT MODE FIX    Query Syntax  SOURce  VOLTage MODE   Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt   Related Commands VOLT TRG VOLT       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 102    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    VOLTage RANGe  LEVel     This command se
207. roughput     The ASCII mode will double the number of characters transferred so provisions for a larger  receive buffer on the PC may have to be made  On the   X  the maximum data size that can  be sent with one command is 16KB  To transfer the entire 4096 waveform acquisition buffer  in ASCII mode requires two separate data transfers of the first followed by the second buffer   The block size and block offset parameters may be used to accomplish this     Conversion function sample VB6  Converting waveform data from either transfer mode to a  single precision value can be accomplished using the following sample routine     Public Function StringToIEEEFloat  ByVal sData As String  ByVal bAsciiMode As Boolean      bAsciiMode flag is used if data is received as 8 ascii chars   representing Hex 0 9 A F  If bAsciiMode flag is false  then   data is process as 4 char representing a byte each  Ascii   mode is needed for DCBS windows    Dim i As Integer  Dim 3 As Integer  Dim iChar As Integer  Dim expo As Long    Dim mantisse As Long  Dim expo_val As Variant          Dim mant_f As Single  Dim c 3  As Long  Must use 32 bit integers to allow for   intermediate result of 24 bit shift  Dim sign As Boolean  A A O A EN  Const MANT MAX    amp H7FFFFF  Const EXPO MAX   2   126    On Error GoTo FloatConvError  If bAsciiMode Then   Retrieve ASC values from eight hex byte input data  sData   UCase sData   For i   0 To 3    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 56    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual 
208. rrent  In constant voltage mode  the output faults to an initial value if the over current  condition is maintained beyond the protection delay period     Command Syntax  SOURce  PONSetup OLOad  MODE   lt mode gt   Parameters CCURrent CVOLtage   Examples OLOad CCUR   Query Syntax PONS OLO    Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt    Related Commands CURR PROT STAT       PONSetup CLOCk    This command determines the source of its clock at the power on  if internal  the source  uses its internal clock  if external  a clock source must be supplied on the appropriate input     Command Syntax  SOURce  PONSetup CLOCk  lt source gt   Parameters INTernal EXTernal  Examples PONSetup CLOCk INT    Query Syntax PONSetup CLOCk   Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt   Related Commands FREQ MODE       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 96    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    PONSetup SENSe    This command determines the source of its voltage sense at the power on  if internal  the  source uses its connection to sense its output voltage  if external  the sense connection must  be connected at the load     Command Syntax  SOURce  PONSetup SENSe  lt source gt   Parameters INTernal EXTernal  Examples PONSetup SENSe INT    Query Syntax PONSetup SENS   Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt   Related Commands VOLTage SENSe       PONSetup WGRoup  iX series only     This command determines the source of its waveform storage  It has a total of 4 groups   Change of group requires power down  an IEE
209. rrent  OC  protection mode  If the overcurrent protection  function is enabled and the load current exceeds the programmed level  then the output is  disabled after a time delay specified by the CURRent PROTection DELay and the  Questionable Condition status register OC bit is set  see chapter 7   An overcurrent  condition is cleared after the cause of the condition is removed     If the  OC  protection mode is disabled  the source operates in the Constant Current mode  and the output voltage will be reduced after a time delay specified by the  CURRent PROTection DELay and the Questionable Condition status register OC bit is set    see chapter 7   An overcurrent condition is cleared after the cause of the condition is  removed     Command Syntax  SOURce  CURRent PROTection STAT e lt bool gt   Parameters 0 1 OFFION      RST Value ON   Examples CURR PROT STAT 0 CURR PROT STAT OFF    Query Syntax  SOURce  CURRent PROTection STATe   Returned Parameters OI   Related Commands OUTP PROT DEL       CURRent PROTection DELay    This command sets the delay time between over current limit condition and the response to  this condition  At the end of the delay  if the over current condition still exist  the response  will depend on the protection state     If the protection state is on  the output voltage will fault to zero voltage  If the protection  state is off  the output voltage will reduced to a value that maintains a constant current  defined by the setting of the current limit     U
210. s   i Series   iX Series    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    2 2 2 Types of SCPI Messages    There are two types of SCPI messages  program and response     e A program message consists of one or more properly formatted SCPI commands sent  from the controller to the AC DC source  The message  which may be sent at any time   requests the AC DC source to perform some action     e Aresponse message consists of data in a specific SCPI format sent from the AC source  to the controller  The AC source sends the message only when commanded by a  program message called a  query      2 2 3 The SCPI Command Tree    As previously explained  the basic SCPI communication method involves sending one or  more properly formatted commands from the SCPI command tree to the instrument as  program messages  The following figure shows a portion of a subsystem command tree   from which you access the commands located along the various paths  you can see the  complete tree in appendix A                           Root     OUTPut 7   STATe     PON  TTLTrg m  STATE       SOURce  IMPedance      REAL          REACtive       STATus  OPERation               EVEN        CONDition        Figure 2 1   Partial Command Tree  The Root Level    Note the location of the ROOT node at the top of the tree  Commands at the root level are  at the top level of the command tree  The SCPI interface is at this location when     e The AC DC source is powered on   e A device clear  DCL  is sent to t
211. s  command only has a query format as these settings cannot be changed     Query Syntax    OPT   Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt    lt CRD gt      The parameter list returned and their order in the sequence is shown in the table below                 Syntax Description Comment   SCPI SCPI language This feature is always enabled on i iX Series models   NOUT MODE option Valid only on 15003i iX systems with MODE option   ADV Advanced Features This feature is always enabled on iX Series models        CLK LOC Clock and Lock mode   Allows multiple controllers to be synced              DO160 Option  160 RTCA DO160 test option   MIL704D Option    704 MIL STD704 test option  rev D E   1EC411 Option  411 IEC61000 4 11 voltage dips and interruptions test    option  This option must be installed to support the  EOS1 or EOS3                             1EC413 Option  413 IEC61000 4 13 Interharmonics test option    WHM Option  WHM Supported only on i iX Series with firmware CIC463   5    ABD Option  ABD Airbus ABD0100 1 8 test option  Requires use of  ClGui32 Windows software    LF Option  LF Limits interharmonics generator direct control output  to 500 Hz maximum    MS704F Option    704F MIL STD704 test option rev A F   Available on Series Il models only    MB Option  MB Allows System field setting in Configuration menu to  be changed to support different configurations    OPT2 Option  B787 Boeing B787 0147 test option  Requires use of  CIGUiSIl Windows software    OPT1 Option  AMD Airbus 
212. s  product series     For front panel operation and general service and calibration information on these produces   please refer to the User Manual  This programming manual covers issue related to operating  the i Series or iX Series remotely using an instrument controller     The following documents are related to this Programming Manual and contain additional  helpful information for using these products in a remote control environment     e User Manual  Includes specifications and supplemental characteristics  how to use the  front panel  how to connect to the instrument  and calibration procedures  For   X Series     refer to User Manual P N 7000 970  for iX Series Il  refer to User Manual UN 4994   970     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 9    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    1 2 Model Series I and Series Il       There are two versions of the i iX Series product  Series   and Series Il  This user manual  covers both model series     The difference between the Series   and the Series II is the controller used  The Series II  uses a more advanced controller but retains functional backward compatibility with the  Series   products  Series Il models have a    Series II    designation shown in the lower right  hand corner of the front panel for easy identification  The actual top assembly part number is  shown on the model   serial number tag on the back of the i iX series     All Series II will have a firmware revision of 4 0 or higher  The firmwa
213. s and the output impedance  ix  only  of the AC DC source     Subsystem Syntax    OUTPut    STATe   lt bool gt  Enable disable output voltage  current  power  etc    PROTection   CLEar Reset latched protection  HI    MODE  lt mode gt  set remote inhibit input  LATC LIVE OFF    TTLTrg    MODE TRIG   FSTR Sets or disabled Function strobe mode     STATe   lt bool gt  Enable disable trigger out drive   SOURce  lt source gt  Selects a TTLTrg source  BOT EOT LIST    IMPedance    STATe   lt bool gt  Enable disable output impedance program    REAL Sets resistive part of output impedance    REACtive Sets inductive part of output impedance    4 10 1 Output Relay    OUTPut  STATEe     This command enables or disables the source output  The state of a disabled output is an  output voltage amplitude set to O volts  with output relays opened  The query form returns  the output state     Command Syntax OUTPut  STATe  lt bool gt   Parameters 0   OFF   1   ON    RST Value OFF   Examples OUTP 1 OUTP STAT ON    Query Syntax OUTPut  STATe    Returned Parameters OI   Related Commands    RCL  SAV       4 10 2 Output Protection  Series II only     OUTPut PROTection CLEar    Available on i iX Series II only  This command clears the latch that disables the output when  an overvoltage  OV   overcurrent  OC   overtemperature  OT   or remote inhibit  RI  fault  condition is detected  All conditions that generated the fault must be removed before the  latch can be cleared  The output is then restored to 
214. s new generation controller version  This chapter  illustrates the few command differences and show sample code on how to handle either  version i series     The iX series is not affected by these differences so you can skip this chapter if you have an  ix series AC DC power source     8 2 Trigger Subsystem       The trigger subsystem has been modified by eliminating the ARM root level command and  replacing it with the TRIGger  TRANsient    MMediate  SOURce command  to further  distinguish between the trigger mode and trigger source command sequences  the  SYNChronize keyword was added to the TRIGger command tree  The old and new trigger  subsystems are shown in the table below     First generation command New generation command changes    ABORt    ABORt    INITiate  IMMediate  INIT  IMMediate   TRANsient  optional  keyword   INITiate CONTinuous INITiate CONTinuous    lt ON OFF gt   lt ON OFF gt    ARM SOURce TRIGger  TRANsient  SOURce changed    lt IMMediate BUS gt   lt IMMediate BUS gt    TRIGger SOURce TRIGger SYNChronize SOURce changed    lt IMMediate PHAS gt   lt IMM PHAS gt    TRIGger PHASe  lt n gt  TRIGger SYNChronize PHASe  lt n gt  changed   TRIGger COUNt TRIGger  TRANsient  COUNt optional    lt NONE ALL gt   lt NONE ALL gt  keyword    TRIGger STATe     iM Series   i Series   iX Series    TRIGger STATe     162    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    8 3 Measurement Calibration Subsystem    The newer   series AC DC power sources use a high res
215. s subsystem controls the triggering of the AC DC power source  See chapter 6 under   Triggering Output Changes  for an explanation of the Trigger Subsystem  The INITiate  commands control the initialization of the transient system  The trigger subsystem must first  be enabled using the INITiate commands or no triggering action will occur  Refer to Figure  6 5 for a block diagram of the trigger system     Subsystem Syntax  ABORt Resets the trigger system to the Idle state    INITiate     MMediate  Initiates the system for one trigger     TRANsient    ACQuire   CONTinuous sets if the initate continuous to  ON OFF   TRIGger    TRANsient     SOURce Sets the trigger source  IMMediate BUS     COUNt Set if the trigger is controlled at every  count NONE ALL    ACQuire    SOURce set the aquire trigger soure   IMMediate SYNChronize BUS TTLTrg    SYNChronize    SOURce  lt source gt  Sets the trigger sync source  IMM PHAS    PHASe  lt n gt  Sets the synchronous phase reference     STATe  Return the trigger state  IDLE ARM BUSY   ABORt    This command resets the transient trigger systems to the Idle state  Any output transient or  measurement that is in progress is immediately aborted  ABORt also cancels any lists or  pulses that may be in process     Command Syntax ABORt  Parameters one    Examples ABOR  Related Commands INIT  RST  TRG       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 119    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    INITiate  IMMediate   TRANsient     The INITiate
216. s the logical OR of all the  Questionable Event register bits that are enabled by the Questionable Status Enable  register     Command Syntax STATus QUESionable ENABle  lt NRf  gt   Parameters 0 to 32727   Default Value 0   Examples STAT QUES ENAB 18    Query Syntax STATus QUEStionable ENABle   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt  Register value   Related Commands STAT QUES EVEN        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 108    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    STATus QUEStionable INSTrument  SUMmary   Phase Selectable    This command returns the value of the Questionable Event register for a specific output of a  three phase AC source  The particular output phase must first be selected by INST NSEL     The Event register is a read only register which holds  latches  all events that are passed by  the Questionable NTR and or PTR filter  Reading the Questionable Event register clears it     Query Syntax STATus QUESionable INSTrument ISUMmary  EVENt    Parameters None  Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   Register Value     Examples STAT QUES INST ISUM EVEN   Related Commands  CLS STAT QUES INST ISUM NTR  STAT QUES INST ISUM PTR       STATus QUEStionable INSTrument  SUMmary CONDition   Phase Selectable    This query returns the value of the Questionable Condition register for a specific output of a  three phase AC source  The particular output phase must first be selected by INST NSEL   The Condition register is a read only register which holds the real time  unla
217. se CURRent PROT DEL to prevent momentary current limit conditions caused by  programmed output changes or load changes from tripping the overcurrent protection     Command Syntax  SOURCE   CURRent  PROTection DELay  Parameters 0 1 to5   Unit seconds    RST Value 100 milliseconds    Examples CURR PROT DEL 1 5  Query Syntax CURR PROT DEL   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt    Related Commands OUTP PROT STATE       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 76    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 12 Source Subsystem   Frequency    This subsystem programs the output frequency of the AC DC source     Subsystem Syntax     SOURce    FREQuency    MMediate   lt n gt  Sets the frequency    MODE  lt mode gt  Sets frequency mode   FIX STEP PULS LIST SENS EXT      SLEW    IMMediate   lt n gt    MAXimum Sets the frequency slew rate    MODE  lt mode gt  Sets frequency slew mode   FIXISTEP PULSILIST    TRIGgered  lt n gt    MAXimum Sets the triggered frequency slew rate   TRIGgered  lt n gt  Sets the triggered frequency  FREQuency    This command sets the frequency of the output waveform     Command Syntax  SOURce  FREQuency  CW  IMMediate   lt NRf  gt   Parameters Refer to specifications table in User Guide   Unit Hz  Hertz     RST Value 60 Hz    Examples FREQ 50   Query Syntax  SOURce  FREQuency   Returned Parameters  lt NR3 gt    Related Commands FREQ MODE FREQ SLEW       FREQuency MODE    This command determines how the output frequency is controlled  The choices are     F
218. sient phase synchronization  use     TRIGger  SYNC SOURce IMMediate    When IMMediate is selected  the trigger system goes directly to the Output state  This is the  parameter selected at  RST     iM Series   i Series     X Series 145    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    6 5 4 Generating Triggers    Providing that you have specified the appropriate trigger source  you can generate triggers  as follows     Single Triggers   By sending one of the following over the IEEE 488    e   INIT   e  TRG   e agroup execute trigger   Continuous Triggers   By sending the following commands over the IEEE 488   e TRIGger  SOURce IMMediate   e   NITiate CONTinuous ON    When the trigger system enters the Output Change state upon receipt of a trigger  see 6 8    the triggered functions are set to their programmed trigger levels  When the triggered actions  are completed  the trigger system returns to the Idle state    Specifying a Dwell Time for Each List Point    Each voltage and frequency list point has an associated dwell time specified by        LIST DWEL1  lt n gt     lt n gt     where  lt n gt  specifies the dwell time in seconds  The number of dwell points must equal the  number of output points  If a dwell list has only one value  that value will be applied to all  points in the output list  After each new output level or point is programmed  the output  remains at that point in the list for the programmed dwell interval before the list advances to  the next p
219. static but assigned by a DHCP server   the NCON parameter  Network  Connection Setting  must be added to the query  The default value is 8  In general Class A  network is 24 bits  Class B is 16 bits and Class A is 8 bits     Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN CLASs  lt NRF gt    Parameters 8 to 32   Example SYST COMM LAN CLAS 8   Query Syntax SYST COMM LAN  CLAS   SYST COMM LAN  CLAS  NCON   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt        SYSTem COMMunicate LAN DEFault    This command will apply the changes in LAN setting to the default setting  The controller will  go to reset condition and the default LAN setting will take effect  Both IP address and Gate  way address are set to zero  The Host name is cleared  The password is reset to     admin   The unit is set to DHCP or Auto IP     Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN DEFault  Parameters none  Example SYST COMM LAN DEF    Query Syntax no query for this command  Returned Parameters none       iM Series   i Series     X Series 113    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    SYSTem COMMunicate LAN DESCription    This command will set the user description  The description is limited to 24 characters    Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN DESCription  lt SRD gt   Parameters  lt SRD gt   Example SYST COMM LAN DESC    EVAL UNIT       Query Syntax SYST COMM LAN DESC   Returned Parameters  lt SRD gt        SYSTem COMMunicate LAN DNSaddress    This command will set the LAN DNS address  Domain Name Server   The query
220. t   value range  127 to  128    Related Commands CALibrate MEASure VOLTage TEMPerature DC ZERO       CALibrate MEASure VOLTage TEMPerature  AC   FSCale   lt NRf gt     This command initiates the calibration of the rms voltage measurement at full scale and at  elevated temperature     Command Syntax CALibrate MEASure VOLTage TEMPerature  AC   FSCale   Parameters  lt NRf gt   actual rms output voltage measured with external device   Examples CAL MEAS VOLT TEMP 120    Query Syntax CALibrate MEASure VOLTage TEMPerature   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   value range  1000 to  1000   Related Commands CALibrate MEASure VOLTage  AMBient   AC   FSCale        iM Series   i Series     X Series 41    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    CALibrate MEASure VOLTage TEMPerature DC  FSCale   lt NRf gt     This command initiates the calibration of the DC voltage measurement at full scale and at  elevated temperature     Command Syntax CALibrate MEASure VOLTage TEMPerature DC  FSCale   Parameters  lt NRf gt   actual DC output voltage measured with external device   Examples CAL MEAS VOLT TEMP 120    Query Syntax CALibrate MEASure VOLTage TEMPerature DC   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   value range  1000 to  1000   Related Commands CALibrate MEASure VOLTage  AMBient  DC  FSCale        CALibrate MEASure VOLTage TEMPerature DC ZERO  lt NRf gt     This command initiates the offset adjustment of the rms voltage measurement at elevated  temperature     Command Syntax CALibrate
221. t VOLTage and voltage mode AC or DC  Examples PONS VOLT 0    Query Syntax PONS VOLT   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 94    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    PONSetup VOLTage MODE    This command sets the initial voltage mode at the power on  This mode is DC or AC    Command Syntax  SOURce  PONSetup  VOLTage MODE  Parameters AC   DC   ACDC  ACDC on ix series only   Examples PONS  VOLTage MODE DC    Query Syntax PONS  VOLTage MODE   Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt        PONSetup CURRent    This command sets the initial current limit at the power on  The maximum allowable current  is controlled by the voltage range and voltage mode     Command Syntax  SOURce  PONSetup CURRent  lt NRf  gt    Parameters range set by the LIMit CURRent  voltage mode and voltage range  Examples PONS CURR 22   Query Syntax PONS CURR    Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        PONSetup PHASe  ANGLe   This command sets the initial phase angle of the power source relative to external reference   Command Syntax  SOURce  PONSetup PHASe  ANGLe  lt NRf  gt     Parameters   360  Examples PONS PHAS 0    Query Syntax PONS PHAS   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt        PONSetup VRANge    This command sets the initial voltage range of the power source for Series   models  The  actual values are a function of the selected voltage range pair  See VOLT RANG PAIR  command in section 4 21  If the range pair is changed  the PONS VRAN setting will  automatical
222. t to program a  frequency while source  is in DC mode   Attempt to set initial  voltage mode to  AC DC   Attempt to program AC  voltage while in DC  mode   Attempt to program  DC voltage while in AC  mode   Attempt to program  voltage offset while in  DC or AC mode only   Attempt to change  sense mode while the  output relay is on   Attempt to change the  voltage mode to DC  while iec413 or iec411  state is on   Attempt to change the  voltage mode to DC  while in external sync  or clock mode      Attempt to change  mode to AC DC  without the ADV option  present  see  OPT        Attempt to use the  phase angle trigger  while iec411 state is  on      Memory error  Waveform memory May be the result of incomplete  checksum error  user defined waveform   download  Check interface and  try downloading waveform  again  Successful download  may clear this error condition   Alternatively  use TRAC DEL  ALL command to clear  waveform memory      314  Save recall memory lost    User setup register Store setup in same register  contents lost again      Configuration memory Hardware configuration   Contact AMETEK service  lost  settings lost  department at  service ppd ametek comto          iM Series   i Series   iX Series 203    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments       obtain instructions on restoring  configuration data      Self test failed  Internal error Contact AMETEK service  department at  service ppd ametek com     Queue overflow  Message queue full  Too man
223. tal output frequency  Harmonic orders can be  queried up to the fundamental measurement bandwidth of the measurement system     UX Series    25 6 microseconds for single phase mode and 76 8 microseconds for three   phase mode   UX Series Il  10 4 microseconds for single phase mode and 31 2 microseconds for three   phase mode     Thus the maximum harmonic that can be measured is dependent on the output frequency   Any harmonics that represent frequencies greater than above frequncies are returned as 0     Query Syntax MEASure  SCALar   VOLTage HARMonic PHASe  lt NRf gt   FETCh  SCALar  VOLTage HARMonic PHASe  lt NRf gt    Parameters 0 to 50   Examples MEAS VOLT HARM PHAS  3    FETC VOLT HARM PHAS  1  Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   Related Commands INST NSEL       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 68    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    MEASure VOLTage HARMonic THD   iX series only   FETCh VOLTage HARMonic THD   iX series only   Phase Selectable    These queries return the percentage of total harmonic distortion and noise in the output  voltage     Query Syntax MEASure  SCALar   VOLTage HARMonic THD   FETCh  SCALar  VOLTage HARMonic THD   Parameters None    Examples MEAS VOLT HARM THD  FETC VOLT HARM THD   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   Related Commands INST NSEL       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 69    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 10 Output Subsystem    This subsystem controls the main outputs  the signal output
224. tched   questionable status of the AC DC power source        Query Syntax STATus QUEStionable INSTrument I SUMmary CONDition   Example STAT QUES INST ISUM COND   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   Register value        STATus QUEStionable INSTrument  SUMmary ENABle  Phase Selectable    This command sets or reads the value of the Questionable Enable register for a specific  output of a three phase AC source  The particular output phase must first be selected by  INST NSEL  The Enable register is a mask for enabling specific bits from the Questionable  Event register to set the questionable summary  QUES  bit of the Status Byte register  This  bit  bit 3  is the logical OR of all the Questionable Event register bits that are enabled by the  Questionable Status Enable register        Command Syntax STATus QUEStionable INSTrument  SUMmary ENABle  lt NRf  gt   Parameters 0 to 32767  Default Value 0    Examples STAT QUES INST ISUM ENAB 18  Query Syntax STATus QUEStionable INSTrument  SUMmary ENABle   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   Register value        iM Series   i Series     X Series 109    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 23 System Commands       The system commands control the system level functions of the AC DC Source     Subsystem Syntax    SYSTem   ERRor  Returns the error number and error string   VERSion  Returns the SCPI version number   LOCal Go to local mode  RS 232 only    REMote Go to remote mode  RS 232 only    CONFigure Set system config
225. the commands within  each subsystem are grouped alphabetically under the subsystem  Commands followed by a  question mark     take only the query form  When commands take both the command and  query form  this is noted in the syntax descriptions     IEEE 488 2 common commands    Common commands are defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard and are described in chapter 0  of this manual     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 35    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 2 Calibration Subsystem       The commands in this subsystem allow you to do the following     e Enable and disable the calibration mode    e Calibrate the measured current and measured voltage and store new calibration in    nonvolatile memory     e Calibrate the current and voltage output levels  and store new calibration constants in    nonvolatile memory     e Calibrate the output impedance of the AC source  and store new calibration constants in    nonvolatile memory     Note  i iX Series Il models have fewer calibration points than series   models  The  Series II will accept all Series   calibration commands but some will have no  effect on Series Il models  Also  the elevated temperature calibration setpoints  are not required on Series Il i iX systems     Subsystem Syntax    CALibrate   PASSword    MEAGure   CURRent    AMBient     AC     FSCale    DC    FSCale      ZERO   TEMPerature    AC     FSCale     DC    FSCale     ZERO     VOLTage    AMBient      AC     FSCale    DC    FSCale      ZE
226. the safety hazards and that any inadvertent  contact with hazardous voltages is eliminated    Guard against risks of electrical shock during open cover checks by not touching any portion of the  electrical circuits  Even when power is off  capacitors may retain an electrical charge  Use safety  glasses during open cover checks to avoid personal injury by any sudden component failure    Neither AMETEK Programmable Power Inc   San Diego  California  USA  nor any of the subsidiary  sales organizations can accept any responsibility for personnel  material or inconsequential injury  loss  or damage that results from improper use of the equipment and accessories     SAFETY SYMBOLS    WARNING A  CAUTION  Risk of Electrical Shock Refer to Accompanying Documents  Off  Supply      Direct Current  DC     Standby  Supply     l    Alternating Current  AC   On  Supply  3   Three Phase Alternating Current    Protective Conductor Terminal L Earth  Ground  Terminal    Fuse me Chassis Ground    I e o    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 4    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    Product Family  iM   i   iX Series AC Power Source  Warranty Period  1 Year    WARRANTY TERMS    AMETEK Programmable Power  Inc    AMETEK      provides this written warranty covering the  Product stated above  and if the Buyer discovers and notifies AMETEK in writing of any defect in  material or workmanship within the applicable warranty period stated above  then AMETEK may  at  its option  repair
227. the state it was in before the fault  condition occurred     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 70    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    Command Syntax OUTPut PROTection CLEar  Parameters None    Examples OUTP PROT CLE  Related Commands OUTP PROT DEL  RCL  SAV       4 10 3 Output Remote Inhibit Mode  Series II only     NOTE  When using the Remote Inhibit input on multi cabinet systems  it will be  necessary to disconnect any RI connection to the i iX master unit when  turning on the i iX master unit  During initialization  the RI connection must be  OPEN or initialization will be halted with the message WARING FOR  AUXILIARY displayed on the LCD screen        OUTPut RI  MODE    Available on i iX Series II only  This command selects the mode of operation of the Remote  Inhibit protection  The following modes can be selected     LATChing A TTL low at the RI input latches the output in the protection shutdown  state  which can only be cleared by OUTPut PROTection CLEar     LIVE The output state follows the state of the RI input  A TTL low at the RI input  turns the output off  a TTL high turns the output on   OFF The instrument ignores the RI input     The RI output state is saved at power down  The factory default state is LIVE     Command Syntax OUTPut RI   MODE   lt mode gt   Parameters LATChing   LIVE   OFF   RST Value LIVE   Examples OUTP RI MODE LIVE    Query Syntax OUTPut RI   MODE   Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt   Related Commands OUTP PROT CLE   
228. their TRIGgered value  In Step mode  the triggered value becomes the  immediate value  In Pulse mode  the functions return to their immediate value during the low    portion of the pulse     If there are no further pulses  the immediate value remains in effect  In List mode  the  functions remain at the last list value at the completion of the list     You can not mix STEP  PULSe  and LIST modes among functions           IMVediate level    FIXED mode    TRIGered level    Ju    WI       IMMediate level    7 7 Ai i  STEP mode         TRIGered level  IMVediate level    PULSE mode      am  8 im    Triggers ignored   output alw ays set to  immediate command  levels     At trigger  the triggered  level becomes the new  immediate level     At trigger  the triggered  level is active during the    pulse width portion of  the pulse waveform        IMVediate level    LIST mode         WAV  Lo    f step 1    Trigger List  Applied Complete    At trigger  the list starts   When list completes   output returns to  immediate level           iM Series   i Series   iX Series    Figure 6 1   Output transient system    140    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    6 4 2 Step and Pulse Transients    Step 1   Set the functions that you do not want to generate transients to FIXed mode  A  convenient way to do this is with the  RST command  Then set the mode of the function that  will generate the transient to STEP or PULSe as required  For example  to enable the  voltage functi
229. tor  This command must be set to the on  state before sending any other command listed in this section     Command Syntax   SOURce   HARmonics STATe  lt boolean gt   Parameters  lt ON OFF 1 0  gt   Examples IHAR ON    Query Syntax IHAR   Returned Parameters  lt boolean gt          SOURce  IHARmonics COUPle    If this command is turned on  the reference voltage for the interharmonics is programmed to  a value equal to the ac program value  If the coupling is turned off  the reference voltage  must be programmed to a value between 0 and 250V     Command Syntax   SOURce   HARmonics COUPle  lt boolean gt   Parameters  lt ON OFF 1 0  gt    Examples IHAR COUP ON   Query Syntax IHAR COUP    Returned Parameters  lt boolean gt          SOURce  I HARmonics FREQuency    This command will program the inter harmonic frequency  This frequency may range from  1Hz to 2400Hz with 1Hz resolution     Command Syntax   SOURCce  IHARmonics F REQuency  lt NRf gt   Parameters  lt frequency  gt   Examples IHAR FREQ 400    Query Syntax IHAR FREQ   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 182    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments      SOURce  I HARmonics REFerence    This command will program the inter harmonic reference voltage  The coupling must be set  to on to accept any program value  The reference will take a value of 0 to 250V     Command Syntax   SOURce  IHARmonics REFerence  lt NRf gt   Parameters  lt reference gt   Examples IHAR REF 230    Q
230. tput Phase Measurements    You can return simultaneous measurements from all output phases of the source in the  three phase mode using the FETCh query  Unlike MEASure queries  FETCh queries do not    iM Series   i Series     X Series 148    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    trigger the acquisition of new data when they are executed  First  you must initiate the  measurement trigger system and generate a measurement trigger as explained in the  following section  Triggering Measurements   When the measurement data has been  acquired by the voltage and current data buffers for each output phase  use  INSTrument NSELect to select each phase  and FETCh to return the specified measurement  data  The following commands return rms voltage    INSTrument NSELect 1   ETCh VOLTage AC    WAI  NSTrument NSELect 2  ETCh  VOLTage AC    WAI  NSTrument NSELect 3  ETCh  VOLTage AC    WAI                      F  I  F  I  El       6 6 6 Returning Voltage and Current Data From the Data Buffer    The MEASure and FETCh queries can also return all 4096 data values of the instantaneous  voltage and current buffers  These are     MEASure ARRay CURRent  DC      WAI  MEASure ARRay VOLTage  DC      WAI       6 6 7 Triggering Measurements    You can use the data acquisition trigger system to synchronize the timing of the voltage and  current data acquisition with an external trigger source  Then use the FETCh commands to  return different calculations from the data acquired by t
231. ts caused the summary bit to be set  Use        STATus   QUEStionable EVENt   STATus OPERation EVENt   ESR                                Note  When an Event register is read  it is cleared  This also clears the  corresponding summary bit     Step 3   Remove the specific condition that caused the event  If this is not possible  the  event may be disabled by programming the corresponding bit of the status group Enable  A  faster way to prevent the interrupt is to disable the service request by programming the  appropriate bit of the Service Request Enable register     7 6 2 Servicing Questionable Status Events    This example assumes you want a service request generated whenever the AC source s  overvoltage  overcurrent  or overtemperature circuits have tripped  From Figure 7 1  note the  required path for Questionable Status conditions at bits 0  1  and 3 to generate a service  request  RQS  at the Status Byte register  The required register programming is as follows     Step 1   Program the Questionable Status Enable register to allow the latched events to be  summed into the QUES summary bit  Use     STATus QUEStionable ENABle 11    Step 2   Program the Service Request Enable register to allow the QUES summary bit from  the Status Byte register to generate RQS  Use               SRE 8  Step 3   When you service the request  read the event register to determine which  Questionable Status Event register bits are set and clear the register for the next event  Use           STA
232. ts the voltage range of the power source  There are some signification  difference between Series   and Series II i iX models that should be considered     Series I  Two pairs of voltage ranges are available   e 135 volt range and a 270 volt range  135 270 range pair   e 150 volt range and a 300 volt range  150 300 range pair    e The AC and DC mode use the same voltage ranges     Sending a parameter other than 135 or 270 when in 135 270 range pair will not be  accepted  Sending a parameter other than 150 or 300 when in 150 300 range pair will  not be accepted     When the range is set to 135  the maximum rms voltage that can be programmed is 135  volts     Series II  Only one voltage range pair exists  e 150 Volt AC range and a 300 Volt AC range  150 300 range pair    e 200 Volt DC range and a 400 Volt DC range  200 400 range pair      The VOLTage RANGe command is coupled with the CURRent command This means that  the maximum current limit that can be programmed at a given time depends on the voltage  range setting in which the unit is presently operating     The VOLTage RANGe command is also coupled with the OUTPut command on DI Series    AC sources with firmware revision 2 39 or higher and on all Series ll models  If the output  relay is closed  OUTP 1   the VOLT RANG command will not be accepted and an error  message will be generated   300     Device Specific Error        To change voltage ranges  the output relay must be opened first  Units with older revisions  would al
233. uery Syntax IHAR REF   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt          SOURce  IHARmonics VOLTage    This command will program the interharmonic voltage as a percentage of the reference  voltage  It will accept a value from 0 to 20      Command Syntax   SOURCce  IHARmonics VOLTage  lt NRf gt   Parameters  lt voltage gt     Examples IHAR VOLT 10    Query Syntax IHAR VOLT   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 183    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    9 4 RTCA DO 160D   160 Option     The following are the remote commands set for DO 160D  ABORt command will terminate  the test in progress at any time     DO160     NORMal    VOLT_FREQ   MINinum     MAXimum   VOLTage  UNBalance     WAVeform  DISTortion   VOLTage   MODulation  lt numeric gt    INTerrupt  lt numeric gt     SURG  DC  UNDer     FREQency   MODulation  lt numeric gt    TRANSIient   VARiation   EMERgency    VOLT_FREQ   MINimum     MAXimum   VOLTage   UNBalance   ABNormal stage   VOLTage   MINimum     MAXimum  UNDer   OVER  DC     LOW    FREQuency   TRANsient   CATegory   STANdard   GROup    DO160 NORMal VOLT_FREQ MINimum  This command will set the voltage and frequency to the minimum level for the normal  operation     Command Syntax DO160 NORMal VOLT_FREQ MINimum  Parameters none    Examples DO160 NORM VOLT_FREQ MIN  Query Syntax none       DO160 NORMal VOLT_FREQ MAXimum    iM Series   i Series   iX Series 184    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments
234. um    Examples VOLT SLEW TRIG1  VOLT SLEW TRIG MAX  Query Syntax  SOURce  VOLTage SLEW TRIGgered   Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt    Related Commands VOLT SLEW MODE VOLT SLEW       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 105    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 22 Status Subsystem Commands    This subsystem programs the AC DC power source status registers  There are four groups  of status registers     e Operation Status Group   e Questionable Status Group   e Questionable Instrument Isummary Group  e Standard Event Group    The Standard Event group is programmed with Common commands  The Operation   Questionable  and Instrument ISummary status groups each consist of the following three  registers     Refer to chapter 7 for more information about the status registers   Subsystem Syntax    STATus   OPERation  EVEN Returns the value of the event register   CONDition Returns the value of the condition register   ENABle  lt n gt  Enables specific bits in the Event register   QUEStionable  EVEN Returns the value of the event register   CONDition Returns the value of the condition register   ENABle  lt n gt  Enables specific bits in the Event register   INSTruments   I  SUMmary  EVEN Returns the selected phase   s event register value   CONDition Returns the selected phase   s condition register    ENABle Enable specific bits in selected phase s Event    register values    Bit Configuration of Status Operation Registers    Bit Position     we  Js Je          CA
235. uration  password required    BYTE   NOUT Set the number of output phases  one or three  if  the mode option is available   ETlMe  Returns the elapse time   TEMPerature Returns the internal ambient temperature in   C   COMMunicate   GPIB   ADDRess Set GPIB address  LAN   ADDRess Set LAN IP address   APPLy Apply the change in setting   CLASs Set LAN Host bits   DEFault Set LAN to a default known setting   DESCription Set user description   DNSaddress Set LAN DNS address   GWADdress Set LAN Gateway    HOST Set the Host name    PASSword Set LAN password    PORT Set LAN socket port address   SERial   BAUD Set the baud rate   PARity Set the parity type     BITS Set number of bits     SBITs Set number of stop bits    SYSTem ERRor     This query returns the next error number followed by its corresponding error message string  from the remote programming error queue  The queue is a FIFO  first in  first out  buffer that  stores errors as they occur  As it is read  each error is removed from the queue  When all  errors have been read  the query returns 0 No Error  If more errors are accumulated than  the queue can hold  the last error in the queue is  350  Too Many Errors     Query Syntax SYSTem ERRor   Parameters None    Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   lt SRD gt   Example SYST ERR        iM Series   i Series   iX Series 110    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    SYSTem VERSion     This query returns the SCPI version number to which the AC DC source complies  
236. ure VOLTage HARMonic   iX series only   FETCh VOLTage HARMonic   iX series only   Phase Selectable    These queries return the rms amplitude of the Nth harmonic of output voltage  The  parameter is the desired harmonic number  Queries sent with a value of 0 return the dc  component  A value of 1 returns the fundamental output frequency  Harmonic orders can be  queried up to the fundamental measurement bandwidth of the measurement system     UX Series    25 6 microseconds for single phase mode and 76 8 microseconds for three   phase mode   UX Series Il  10 4 microseconds for single phase mode and 31 2 microseconds for three   phase mode     Thus the maximum harmonic that can be measured is dependent on the output frequency   Any harmonics that represent frequencies greater than above frequncies are returned as 0     Query Syntax MEASure  SCALar   VOLTage HARMonic  AMPLitude    lt NRf gt   FETCh  SCALar  VOLTage HARMonic  AMPLitude   lt NRf gt    Parameters 0 to 50   Examples MEAS VOLT HARM  3    FETC VOLT HARM  1  Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt   Related Commands INST NSEL       MEASure VOLTage HARMonic PHASe   iX series only   FETCh VOLTage HARMonic PHASe   iX series only   Phase Selectable    These queries return the phase angle of the Nth harmonic of output voltage  referenced to  the positive zero crossing of the fundamental component     The parameter is the desired harmonic number  Queries sent with a value of 0 return the dc  component  A value of 1 returns the fundamen
237. urn a 1 when the test is completed     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 191    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    9 6 Airbus ABD0100 1 8 Tests   ABD Option        The  ABD option is implemented through the ClGuiSII Windows software provided with each  AC power source  As such  there are no SCPI commands that apply to the  ABD option and  they cannot be executed from the front panel     9 7 Airbus AMD24 Test Option   AMD Option        The  AMD option is implemented through the CIGuiSll Windows software  version 2 2 0 0 or  higher  provided with each AC power source  As such  there are no SCPI commands that  apply to the  AMD option and they cannot be executed from the front panel     9 8 Airbus A350 Test Option   A350 Option        The    A350 option is implemented through the CIGuiSIl Windows software  version 2 2 0 4 or  higher  provided with each AC power source  As such  there are no SCPI commands that  apply to the  A350 option and they cannot be executed from the front panel     9 9 Boeing B787 0147 Test Option   B787 Option        The    B787 option is implemented through the CIGuiSIl Windows software  version 2 1 0 0 or  higher  provided with each AC power source  As such  there are no SCPI commands that  apply to the  B787 option and they cannot be executed from the front panel     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 192    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    9 10 OMNI OPTION       9 10 1 Remote Programming    The OMNI rem
238. utput  SQUare A squarewave is output  CSIN The output is a clipped sine waveform  Both positive and negative    peak amplitudes are clipped at a value determined by the  SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe CSINusoid setting      lt waveform_name gt  The output shape is described by one of the user defined waveform  tables     The maximum peak voltage that the AC source can output is 425 V peak  This includes any  combination of voltage and function shape values  Therefore  the maximum value that can  be programmed depends on the peak to rms ratio of the selected waveform  For a  sinewave  the maximum voltage that can be programmed is 300 V rms  If a custom  waveform is selected for a given phase as part of the function list  the maximum  programmable rms voltage of the corresponding voltage list point or the end voltage which  results from the previous list point   s voltage and the voltage slew rate times the dwell time  should not exceed the maximum possible rms value for the selected custom waveform or an  execution error will be generated and the transient list will not execute     Command Syntax  SOURce  LIST FUNCtion  SHAPe   lt shape gt    lt shape gt    Parameters depends on the available shape defined by the TRACe CAT   Examples LIST FUNC SIN ARRAY TRIANG   Query Syntax  SOURce  LIST FUNC  SHAPe      Returned Parameters  lt CRD gt   Related Commands LIST FUNC POIN  LIST COUN LIST DWEL  LIST STEP LIST  VOLT       LIST FUNCtion POINts     This query returns the number of points spec
239. values     LIST  VOLTage 135  100  120  135  100  128  110  102  132  112    You can specify lists for more than one function  For example  to synchronize the previous  voltage list with another list that varies the output frequency from nominal  to high  to low  the  lists may include the following values     LIST  VOLTage 135  100  120  135  100  128  110  102  132  112  LIST FREQuency 60  60  60  63  63  63  57  57  57  60    All lists must have the same number of data values or points  or an error will occur when the  transient system that starts the sequence is later initiated  The exception is when a list has  only one item or point  In this case the single item list is treated as if it had the same number  of points as the other lists  with all values being equal to the one item  For example                          LIST  VOLTage 120  100  110 FREQuency 60  is the same as     iM Series   i Series   iX Series 142    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    LIST  VOLTage 120  100  110  LIST  FREQuency 60  60  60    Step 3   Determine the time interval that the output remains at each level or point in the list  before it advances to the next point  The time is specified in seconds  For example  to  specify five dwell intervals  use           EPSTDWEbL LT  3 60  LD  Des  358  162    The number of dwell points must equal the number of output points  If a dwell list has only  one value  that value will be applied to all points in the output list        Ste
240. ve parameters  For example  FIX    STEP indicates that either  FIX  or  STEP  can be used as a  parameter     Items within square brackets are optional  The representation   SOURce  LIST means that SOURce  may be omitted     Braces indicate parameters that may be repeated zero or more  times  It is used especially for showing arrays  The notation  lt A gt    lt  B gt  shows that parameter  A  must be entered  while parameter   B  may be omitted or may be entered one or more times   Boldface font is used to emphasize syntax in command definitions   TRIGger SOURCe lt NRf gt  shows a command definition    Computer font is used to show program lines in text   TRIGger SOURCe INT   shows a program line     2 2 The SCPI Commands and Messages       This paragraph explains the syntax difference between SCPI Commands and SCPI    messages     2 2 1 Types of SCPI Commands    SCPI has two types of commands  common and subsystem     e Common commands are generally not related to specific operations but to controlling  overall AC source functions such as reset  status and synchronization  All common  commands consist of a three letter mnemonic preceded by an asterisk      RST    IDN         SRE 256    e Subsystem commands perform specific AC DC source functions  They are organized  into an inverted tree structure with the  root  at the top  Some are single commands  while others are grouped within specific subsystems     Refer to appendix A for the AC source SCPI tree structure     iM Serie
241. xample LIST TTLT POIN   Related Commands LIST TTLT       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 90    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 16 8 List Voltage    LIST  VOLTage  Phase Selectable    This command specifies the output voltage points in a list  The voltage points are given in  the command parameters  which are separated by commas  The order in which the points  are entered determines the sequence in which the list will be output when a list transient is  triggered     Command Syntax  SOURce  LIST VOLTage  LEVel   lt NRf  gt   lt NRf  gt   Parameters Value depends on the voltage range and the voltage mode  Unit V  rms voltage   Examples LIST VOLT 2 0 2 5 3 0   LIST VOLT MAX 2 5 MIN    Query Syntax  SOURce  LIST VOLTage  LEVel     Returned Parameters  lt NR2 gt    Related Commands LIST  VOLT POIN  LIST COUN LIST DWELLIST STEP  LIST SHAP LIST VOLT OFFS       LIST VOLTage POINts   Phase Selectable    This query returns the number of points specified in LIST VOLT  Note that it returns only the  total number of points  not the point values     Query Syntax  SOURce  LIST VOLTage POINts   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt    Example LIST  VOLT POIN    Related Commands LIST  VOLT       LIST  VOLTage SLEW  Phase Selectable    This command specifies the output offset slew points in a list  The slew points are given in  the command parameters  which are separated by commas  The order in which the points  are entered determines the sequence in which the list will
242. xamples CAL REAL  10   Query Syntax CALibrate  SOURce  REACtive  FSCale    Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   value range 0 to  300    Related Commands CALibrate  SOURce  REAL  FSCale        CALibrate  SOURce  REACtive ZERO  lt Nrf  gt     This command will set the lowest reactive part of the output impedance that could be  programmed     Command Syntax CALibrate  SOURce  REACtive ZERO  lt NRf  gt   Parameters  lt NRf gt   a value between 0 and  300   Examples CAL REACtive ZERO 100    Query Syntax CALibrate  SOURce  REACtive ZERO   Returned Parameters  lt NR1 gt   value range 0 to  300   Related Commands CALibrate  SOURce  REAL ZERO       iM Series   i Series   iX Series 48    AC Source SCPI Programming Manual California Instruments    4 3 Display Subsystem    This subsystem allows text information to be send to the power source LCD display  Typical  applications are to display operator prompts or program status information on the power  source display     Note  This capability requires firmware revision 4 31 or higher     The display on the i iX Series has a maximum capacity of 8 x 40 ASCII characters  both  lower and upper case  The application program is responsible for formatting each line  No  padding or length checking is performed by the power source firmware     Subsystem Syntax    DISPlay    WINDow     STATe  on   off   1 0   MODe NORMal   TEXT   MEASurement     TEXT  DATA   XXXXXX    LOCation  lt NR1 gt   lt NR1 gt   DISPlay    This command turns the front panel displ
243. y messages  Read  status using SYST ERR query  until 0   No Error  is received  indicating queue empty      Query error  Unable to complete Check programming manual for  query  correct query format and  parameters     Query INTERRUPTED  Query issued but Check application program for  response not read  correct flow  Response must be  read after each query to avoid  this error      420  Query Query incomplete  Check for terminator after  UNTERMINATED  query command    430  Query DEADLOCKED  Query cannot be Check application program for  completed multiple queries   440  Query Query incomplete  Check for terminator after  UNTERMINATED  query command     1  Output volt fault  Output voltage does not   Load exceeds current limit and   match programmed unit is in Constant Voltage  CV    value  mode of operation  Reduce  load or increase CL setting  Output voltage is driven above  programmed voltage by  external influence  Load   voltage kickback  etc       Current limit fault  Current limit exceeded    Load exceeds current limit and  unit is in Constant Voltage  CV   mode of operation  Reduce  load or increase CL setting     Temperature fault  Temperature of heat Reduce load  Ensure proper air  sink too high  flow and exhaust clearance   Check fan s  for operation     4  External sync  error  Could not sync to External sync signal missing   external sync signal  disconnected or out of range    5  Initial memory lost  Power on settings could   Save power on settings again  not be r
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Manuale dell`utente Avision Inc.  MARCHé DE L`ART ET EXPERTISE  カタログ  User Manual  Home Decorators Collection GH-120202 Instructions / Assembly  Epson LW-400 Quick Tips  A400M on DAHDI User Manual  Navodila  Malibu 8419-3511-10 Instructions / Assembly    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file